tvet certificate iv in networking

4

TVET CERTIFICATE IV in

NETWORKING

CODE

ICTNEW4001

Kigali November, 2014

2 | P a g e

ICTNEW4001-TVET CERTIFICATE IV

Networking

REQF Level 4 CURRICULUM

i | P a g e

© Workforce Development Authority, 2014

Copies available from:

Workforce Development Authority (WDA)

P. O. BOX 2707 Kigali

Tel : (+250) 255113365

Fax : (+250) 255113365

Email : [email protected]

Web: www.wda.gov.rw

Original published version updated:

November, 2014

ii | P a g e

Copyright

The Competent Development Body of this Curriculum is © Workforce Development Authority

(WDA). Reproduced with permission.

The following copyright warning applies to the material from the Training Package:

All rights reserved. This work has been produced initially with WDA. This work is copyright, but

permission is given to trainers and teachers to make copies by photocopying or other duplicating

processes for use with their own training organizations or in a workplace where the training is

being conducted. This permission does not extend to the making of copies for use outside the

immediate training environment for which they are made, nor the making of copies for hire or

resale to third parties. The views expressed in this version of the work do not necessarily

represent the views of WDA. The competent Body does not give warranty nor accept any liability.

The WDA owns the copyright on all Curricula. Schools may reproduce this program in part or in

full for bona fide study or classroom purposes only. Acknowledgement of the WDA copyright

must be included on any reproductions. Learners may copy reasonable portions of the curriculum

for the purpose of study. Any other use of this curriculum must be referred to theWDA. Ph: (+250)

255113365; fax: (+250) 255113365.

© Workforce Development Authority (WDA) 2014

Published by

Workforce Development Authority (WDA)

P. O. BOX 2707 Kigali

Tel : (+250) 255113365

Internet: http:// www.wda.gov.rw

http://www.wda.gov.rw/

iii | P a g e

Table of Contents

C o p y r i g h t i i

T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s i i i

L i s t o f a b b r e v i a t i o n s v i i i

A c k n o w l e d g m e n t s x i

1 . G E N E R A L I N T R O D U C T I O N 1

2 . Q U A L I F I C A T I O N D E T A I L S 2

2.1 Description 2

2.2 Minimum entry requirements 2

2.3 Information about pathways 2

2.4 Job related information 2

2.5 Employability skills and life skills 2

2.6 Information about competencies 4

3 . T R A I N I N G P A C K A G E 5

3.1 Course structure 5

3.2Competencies chart 5

3.3 Flowchart 7

A S S E S S M E N T G U I D E L I N E S 8

4.1 Assessment Methodology 8

4.2 Portfolio 8

LU 1: Identify elements of business plan. 15

LU 2: Write a business plan in line with the identified elements 22

U 3:Establish strategies to monitor evaluate and update the business plan (Contingency plan). 34

LU 4: Present a business plan 41

C C M C S 4 0 1 - C O M P U T E R S K I L L S 4 7

LU 2: Describe the operating system 49

LU 3: Customize computer features 55

LU3: Protect computer system 60

C C M E N 4 0 1 - I N T E R M E D I A T E W O R K P L A C E E N G L I S H 6 6

LU 1: Write factual, descriptive, and explanatory texts. 69

iv | P a g e

LU 2: Apply a range of listening strategies to understand predictable messages. 78

LU 3: Discuss general and trade-related topics. 83

LU4: Read medium texts on general and trade-related topics. 88

C C M H E 4 0 1 - I M P L E M E N T I N G S . H . E . P O L I C I E S A N D P R O C E D U R E S 9 4

L U 1 : Identify hazardous areas to be improved. 96

LU 2 : Apply SHE practices. 102

LU 3: Assess and control risks. 110

LU 4: Awareness of SHE in working place. 116

N W I A 4 0 2 - N D U S T R I A L A T T A C H M E N T P R O G R A M ( I A P ) 1 5 1

LU 1: Investigate and secure industrial attachment place 153

LU 2: Deal with workplace challenges 163

LU 3: Get briefed on industrial attachment program 168

C C M K N 4 0 1 - I K I N Y A R W A N D A C Y ’ U M U N Y A M W U G A 1 7 9

LU 1: Gukoresha ubuvanganzo gakondo bufatiye ku mwuga ashyikirana n’abandi. 182

LU 3: Gukoresha Ikinyarwanda kiboneye agaragaza ibyiza 187

by’ikoranabuhanga mu iterambere ry’umwuga no gutandukanya

ubwoko bw’inshinga. 187

Imbumbe 192

LU 3: Gukoresha Ikinyarwanda kiboneye uwiga agaragaza ububi bw’ibiyobyabwenge mu rubyiruko no

kugaragaza mu izina mbonera amategeko y’igenamajwi agendanye n’ingombajwi ziburizwamo

n’izihinduka izindi. 192

LU 4: Gukoresha Ikinyarwanda kiboneye uwiga agaragaza uburyo bunyuranye bwo gufata neza

ibidukikije no gukoresha indangahantu icyungo” na“ mu nteruro 196

LU 5: Gukoresha Ikinyarwanda kiboneye uwiga agaragaza akamaro k’ubutabazi bw’ibanze no

gukoresha impakanyi n’indango z’inshinga. 201

C C M Q S 4 0 1 - P R O V I D I N G Q U A L I T Y C U S T O M E R S E R V I C E 2 0 6

LU 1: Develop and maintain product, service and market knowledge. 209

LU 2: Provide a quality service experience to customers. 223

LU 3: Deal with complaints and difficult customer service situations. 232

LU 4: Manage and use information about clients and customers. 246

G E N A M 4 0 1 - F U N D A M E N T A L M A T H E M A T I C A L A N A L Y S I S 2 5 4

LU 1: Determine and analyze algebraic functions 257

v | P a g e

LU 2: Apply fundamentals of differentiation 263

LU 3: Apply exponential functions 268

P H Y M P 4 0 1 - M E C H A N I C S A N D P R O P E R T I E S O F M A T T E R 2 7 9

LU 1: Describe laws of motion and their applications 282

LU 2: Apply static equilibrium and elasticity 287

LU 3: Analyze fluid mechanics 292

LU 4: Apply thermodynamics 297

LU 5: Examine current flow effects in DC electric circuit 306

LU 6: Apply Geometric instruments 312

N E W N F 4 0 1 - N E T W O R K F U N D A M E N T A L S 3 1 8

LU1: Introduce Network Concepts 320

325

LU2: Apply network protocols and communications 325

329

LU3: Apply IP addressing (IP v4&IPv6) 329

N E W N M 4 0 1 - N E T W O R K M A I N T E N A N C E 3 3 4

336

LU 1:Conduct site survey 336

341

LU 2: Determine and implement solutions 341

345

LU 3:Document the work done 345

Summative Assessment 350

N E W S L 4 0 1 - L A N 3 5 4

LU 1:Apply basics of Computer networking and set up a LAN 356

363


LU 3:Configure and troubleshoot a LAN 369

374

LU 4: Document the work done 374

378

vi | P a g e

LU 5:Troubleshoot router 378

N E W P R 4 0 1 - R O U T I N G 3 8 3

LU 1: Introduce routing and packet forwarding 385

392


398

LU 3:Configure and verify Routing Protocols 398

404


409



N E W P S 4 0 1 - S W I T C H I N G 4 1 7

LU 1:Introduction to switched networks 420


432

LU 3: Describe Basic switching concepts and configuration 432

439

LU 4: Introduce VLANs configurations 439

444

LU 5:Perform VTP configurations 444

448

LU 6:Perform STP configurations 448

452

LU 7:ImplementInter-VLAN routing 452

LU 8:Perform VTP configurations 456



N E W W I 4 0 1 - W I R E L E S S N E T W O R K I N D O O R 4 6 9

LU 1:Apply wireless network Concepts 471

476

vii | P a g e

LU 2:Plan and Conduct Site survey 476

482

LU 3:Configure and maintain wireless network 482

488



G L O S S A R Y 4 9 6

viii | P a g e

List of abbreviations

AIDS Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome

ANSI American National Standard Institute

ARP Attacks Address Resolution Protocol attacks

BGP Border Gateway Protocol

BPDU Timers Bridge Protocol Data Units

CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telephony and Telegraphy

CCM Complementary Competencies

CD Compact Disk

CDU Curriculum Development Unit

CIDR Classless Inter-Domain Router

CLI Command Line Interface

CPU Control Processing Unit

DHCP Dynamic Host Control Protocol

DNS Domain Name service

DoS Denial of service

DVD Digital Video Disc

EIGRP Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol

GUI Graphical User Interface

HIV Human Immunodeficiency Virus

HSRP Hot standby router protocol

I/O Input/output

ICT Information Communication Technology

ICTNW ICT sector Networking sub sector

IEEE Institute of Electrical Electronics Engineers

IGRP Interior Gateway Routing Protocol

ILO International Labor Organization

IOS Internetwork Operating System

IP Internet Protocol

IP v4 Internet Protocol version4

ix | P a g e

IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6

IS-IS Interconnection System to Interconnection System

ISL Inter-switch Link

ISO International Organization of standards

ISP Internet service provider

IT Information Technology

LAN Local Area Network

LEDs Light Emitting Diode

LLC Logical link control

MAC Address Media access control Address

MAN Metropolitan Area Network

MAU Media Access Unit

NAT Network Address Translation

NICs Network Interface Cards

NTQF National Technical Qualification Framework

OSI model Open Systems Interconnection

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

OSPFv2 Open Shortest Path First Version2

PC Personal Computer

PCI Payment Card Industry

PDA Personal Digital Assistance

PDAs Personal Digital Assistant

PoE Path of Exile

PPE Personal Protective Equipment

PVST Per-VLAN Spanning Tree

RAM Random Access Memory

REQF Rwandan Education Qualification Framework

RF Radio Frequency

RFID Radio-frequency identification

RIPv1 Introduction to Routing Information Protocol version1

RIPv2 Introduction to Routing Information Protocol

x | P a g e

ROM Read Only Memory

SOHO Small Office Home Office

SSH Secure Shell

STI Sexual Transmission Infection

STP Shielded Twisted Pair

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TSS Technical Secondary School

TVET Technical and Vocational Education and Training

USB Universal Serial Bus

VGA Video Graphical Adapter

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VPN Virtual Private Network

VSO Voluntary Service Overseas

WAN Wide Area Network

WLAN Wireless Local Area Network

xi | P a g e

Acknowledgments

Workforce Development Authority wishes to thank the following persons who participated in

the development of this curriculum:

Coordination

HABIMANA Theodore, Director of TVET-WDA

MUHIRE JMV, Head Curriculum Development Unit- WDA

Facilitators

RWAMASIRABO Aimable, Curriculum Developer –WDA

NIKUZE Bernadette, Curriculum Developer –WDA

Curriculum Development Team

Name Function Institution/Occupation

MUDAHERANWA Herve IT Peace plan

NDAGIJIMANA Straton Trainer ES Nyarusange

HABUMUGISHA Patrick Instructor IPRC Kigali

BUJERERI Didier IT World vision/Rwanda

HABYARIMANA Jean IT LPS

SHARAMANZI Simon Pierre IT Manager New Africa Gaming Ltd

HABUMUGISHA Fulgence Instructor IPRC Kigali

NIYONGABO Ezekiel N.CE Ltd

NTWALI Yves Network Administrator RPPA

NSENGIMANA Lindiro Giscar IT Computer Union Technology Ltd

MUGISHA Martin Network Officer Global communities

MUKUNDWA Alice INILAK

MUGUME Arthur Rwanda Network

HATANGIMBABAZI Hilaire Trainer GS Indangaburezi

NKUBANA Alphonse IT AfricaMinerals supplies Ltd

1 | P a g e

1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION

The curriculum presents a coherent and significant set of competencies to

acquire to perform the occupation ofaNetwork Technician. It is designed with

an approach that takes into account the training needs, the work situation, as

well as the goals and the means to implement training.

The modules of the curriculum include a description of the expected results at the end of training.

They have a direct influence on the choice of the theoretical and practical learning activities. The

competencies are the targets of training: the acquisition of each is required for certification.

The curriculum is the reference to carry out the assessment of learning. Assessment tools of

learning are developed on the basis of this document.

The curriculum consists of three parts. The first part is of general interest and shows the nature

and goals of a program and the key concepts and definitions used in the document. The second

part presents the qualification, its level in the qualification framework, its purpose, its rationale

and the list of modules it comprises. The third part deals with the training package. It includes

the competencies chart, the sequencing of module learning, the description of each module and

the course structure.

The pages describing the modules are the heart of a curriculum. They present the title of the

module, the length of training, the amount of credits, the context in which the competency is

performed, the prerequisite competencies, the learning units and the performance criteria.

In each module, a course structure is provided. The course structure describes the learning

outcomes (knowledge, skills and attitude) and the learning contents related to each learning unit.

Also, the learning activities and resources for learning are suggested.

Finally, the assessment specifications and guidelines are included in each module.

Section

1

2 | P a g e

2. QUALIFICATION DETAILS

2.1 Description

This qualification provides the skills and

knowledge for an individual to install and

manage small and medium scale networks

and other various jobs in networking field,

either as an independent Network

technician or as part of a team. The

individuals with this qualification can enter

the TVET Certificate V in order to be

equipped with the necessary competences

to function as Network Administrator, Senior

IT technician.

At the end of this qualification, qualified

learners will be able to:

Implement health safety and environment precaution (SHE)

Develop business plan

Provide quality customer service

Apply Computer Skills

Use Intermediate English at workplace

Gukoresha i Kinyarwanda cy’ umunyamwuga

Apply Fundamental Mathematical Analysis Apply mechanics and properties of matter

Apply Network fundamentals Set up LAN Perform Routing Perform Switching Setup Wireless Network indoor Perform Network Maintenance

Integrate the workplace

2.2 Minimum entry requirements

The minimum entry requirement to this

qualification is to be physically and mentally

fit with broad knowledge, skills and attitude

of ICT background.

Title: TVET Certificate IV in Networking

Level: REQF Level 4

Credits: 123

Sector: Information Technology

Sub-sector: Networking

Issue date: November, 2014

Section

2

2 | P a g e

2.3 Information about pathways

2.4 Job related information

This qualification prepares individuals to integrate his/her knowledge in all ICT related fields. This

qualification again offers the opportunity to execute the works as computer maintenance (Soft and

Hardware units), computer security and its apparatuses, Electronic machines/devices installation and

monitoringsuch as (CCTVs, MODEMs and ANALOG and DIGITAL Phones) while ensuring that safety,

security and environmental regulations are respected.

2.5 Employability skills and life skills

Through the generic modules, individuals with this qualification have acquired the life and

employability skills to meet the following industry or enterprise requirements:

Communication

Documenting technical work in plain English

Writing and presenting reports

Preferred pathways for candidates

entering this qualification include:

Candidates enter this qualification

after achieving TVET Certificate III in

Computer System technology or

other relevant qualifications or

through Recognition of Prior Learning

in Computer and Networking field.

Progression route of candidates

achieving this qualification include:

Candidate’s exit this qualification is

able to enter TVET Certificate V in

Networking or a range of other

related TVET Certificate V

qualifications.

Pathways into the qualification

Pathways from the qualification

Possible jobs related to this qualification

IT support

Network Technician

IT Technician

Cabling Technician

3 | P a g e

Safety and security precautions

Working collaboratively with project team members

Health and environment

Health reproduction

Rwanda environmental protection, practices rules and regulations

Business Plan

Producing a small IT business plan

Planning and organizing

Preparing feasibility reports that take into account project scope, time, cost, quality,

communications and risk management

Self-management

Taking responsibility for own outputs in relation to specified quality standards

Working according to the Rwandan Computer Society Code of Ethics regarding

security, legal, moral and ethical issues

Technology

Manipulate computer

Using internet

Languages other than Kinyarwanda

Using English as the medium of communication in the working environment

4 | P a g e

Number of competencies: 15 Core competencies : 9 Complementary competencies : 6 The total number of Credits: 123

2.6 Information about competencies

No Code Complementary competencies Credit

1 CCMCS401 Apply Computer skills 3

2 CCMQS401 Provide quality customer service 3

3 CCMHE401 Implement SHE policies and procedures 3

4 CCMEN401 Use intermediate English at workplace 3

5 CCMKN401 Gukoresha I Kinyarwanda cy’umunyamwuga 3

6 CCMDB401 Develop business plan 3

Total 18

No Code Core competencies Credit

GEN

ERA

L

1 GENAM401 Apply Fundamental Mathematical Analysis 8

2 PHYMP401 Apply mechanics and properties of matter

4

3 NEWNF401 Apply network fundamentals

8

SPEC

IFIC

4 NEWSL401 Set up LAN 12

5 NEWPR401 Perform Routing 12

6 NEWPS401 Perform Switching 12

7 NEWWI401 Setup Wireless Network indoor 12

8 NEWNM401 Perform Network Maintenance 7

9 NEWIA401 Integrate workplace 30

Total 105

5 | P a g e

3. TRAINING PACKAGE

The training package includes the competencies chart, the flowchart, the

modules, the course structure, and the assessment guidelines.

3.1 Course structure

The course structure describes the learning outcomes for each learning unit. These learning

outcomes are the essential skills and knowledge to be acquired. The contents to be covered for

each learning outcome are prescriptive. The Learning Activities contain a series of suggestions,

usually with several options, that will guide the learner and the trainer.

3.2Competencies chart

The competencies chart is a table that presents an overview of the specific competencies, the

general competencies, the work process and the time allocated to each competency. This table

provides an overall view of the competencies of the training program and allows identification of

the logical sequence of the learning of these competencies.

The competencies chart shows the relationship between general competencies and specific

competencies that are particular to the occupation, as well as the key stages of the work process.

It shows the links between the elements in the horizontal axis and those in the vertical axis. The

symbol (ο) marks a relationship between a general competency and specific competency. The

symbol (∆) indicates a relationship between a specific competency and a step in the process of

work. When the symbols are darkened, it indicates that the link is taken into account in the

description of the specific competency.

The competencies chart allows the trainer to consider the complexity of the competencies in the

organization of the progress of learning. Therefore, the vertical axis shows the specific

competencies in the order they should be acquired.

This is the starting point of the presentation of the competencies in the flowchart presented in

the following pages.

Section

3

6 | P a g e

NETWORK TECHNICIAN PROCESS GENERAL AND COMPLEMENTARY COMPETENCES

SPECIFIC COMPETENCIES Du

rati

on

( 8

50

Hrs

)

An

alyz

e th

e si

te

Mak

e a

sch

emat

ic d

iagr

am

Imp

lem

ent

the

wo

rk

Test

th

e w

ork

do

ne

Do

cum

ent

the

wo

rk d

on

e

Ap

ply

Co

mp

ute

r sk

ills

Pro

vid

e q

ual

ity

cust

om

er s

ervi

ce

Imp

lem

ent

SHE

po

licie

s a

nd

pro

ced

ure

s

Use

inte

rme

dia

te E

ngl

ish

at

wo

rkp

lace

Gu

kore

sha

I Kin

yarw

and

a cy

’um

un

yam

wu

ga

Dev

elo

p b

usi

nes

s p

lan

Net

wo

rk f

un

dam

enta

ls

Ap

ply

Fu

nd

ame

nta

l Mat

hem

atic

al A

nal

ysis

Ap

ply

mec

han

ics

and

wav

es

# 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Duration (380 Hrs) 30

30

30

30

30

30

80

80

40

8 Set up LAN 120 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ● ● ●

9 Perform Routing 120 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ● ● ●

10 Perform Switching 120 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ● ● ●

11 Setup Wireless N/w indoor 120 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ● ● ●

12 Perform Network Maintenance 70 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ● ● ●

16 Integrate the workplace 300 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Figure 1: Competencies chart

Between the process and particular competencies| Between general and particular competencies

▲:Functional link application ●: Functional link application

∆: Functional link existence ο: Functional link existence

7 | P a g e

3.3 Flowchart

The flowchart of sequencing of learning is a schematic representation of the order of acquisition

of the competencies. It provides an overall planning of the entire training programme and shows

the relationship between the modules. This type of planning is to ensure consistency and

progression of learning. For each module, the flowchart shows the learning that is already in

place, the learning that is to take in parallel or later. The positions defined will have a decisive

impact on all subsequent pedagogical choices. The flowchart of the sequence of learning of the

modules of the training programme is presented on the following page.

Fundamental Mathematical Analysis 8

LAN 12

Figure 2: Flowchart

Computer skills 3 Providing quality customer service 3

Implementing S.H.E. Policies and procedures 3 Intermediate workplace english 3

Ikinyarwanda cy’umunyamwuga 3

Switching 12

Wireless Network indoor 12

Network Maintenance 7

Mechanics and properties of matter 4

Network fundamentals 8

Routing 12

Business plan development 3

Industrial Attachment Program -AIP 30

8 | P a g e

ASSESSMENT GUIDELINES

4.1 Assessment Methodology

To assess knowledge, practical, and application skills through any form of continuous evaluation

that encourages learners to display understanding of the principles in application to set practical

tasks and their attendant theory to assess self-learning.

4.2 Portfolio

A portfolio is a collection of learner work representing learner performance. It is a folder (or

binder or even a digital collection) containing the learner’s work as well as the learner’s

evaluation of the strengths and weaknesses of the work. Portfolios reflect not only work

produced (such as papers and assignments, direct demonstration, indirect demonstration,

products, documents), but also it is a record of the activities undertaken over time as part of

learner learning. The portfolio is meant to show learner growth, development, and achievements

in the education system. It also shows that you have met specific learning goals and

requirements. A portfolio is not a project; it is an ongoing process for the formative assessment.

Besides, it will serve as a verification tool for each candidate that he/she attended the whole

training before he/she undergoes the summative assessment for specific modules.

There are two types of assessment (Formative Assessment and Summative/Integrated

Assessment).

Formative Assessment

The formative assessment is an assessment which is given progressively during the

training

This is applied on all types of modules (e.g. Complementary, General and Specific

modules)

Formative assessments are recommended to prepare the trainee for

summative/integrated assessment

Section

4

9 | P a g e

Summative/Integrated Assessment

This is given at the end of the module delivery. It helps to make sure that the learner has

successfully acquired the competence and he is able to translate the knowledge, skills and

attitude into workplace situation.

All Summative/Integrated assessment should match with the content of the module in

the curriculum.

Summative/Integrated Assessment is always in practical, giving it as a theoretical type of

assessment is not acceptable.

The integrated situation provided in the curriculum is a sample of the assessment to be

carried out, the Trainer/Teacher has the role of developing another one referring to the

task to be carried out in the integrated situation in accordance to the circumstances

inside school, but the integrated situation should stick on the components of a task.

During Summative/Integrated assessment, assessor panel members should be three (3).

This Summative/Integrated assessment can be seen in specific modules and the Trainee

can be declared competent by the following rules:

1. For YES or NO scoring of indicators in Summative/Integrated Checklist

The trainee can be declared competent based on the assessment CRITERIA and its respective

assessment indicators

Assessment Criteria Passing Line in the

assessment indicators

Quality of Process 90%

Quality of Product 100%

Relevance 90%

Rest of Criteria/ any other criteria

(example: Safety)

100%

Note: The Assessor should check if the 10% indicator (Quality of Process and Relevance) in which

the Trainee was not able to meet during Summative/Integrated Assessment should not be among

those indicators that can cause any hazard, or the one indicator that is performed poorly where

there is room for improvement.

10 | P a g e

1. During assessment, trainees with special needs (e.g. people with disability) should be

assisted accordingly.

2. It is the responsibility of the school to consider the status (competent/not yet competent)

of trainees and conduct reassessments when necessary

3. Respect of flowchart and chronogram particularly in considering the delivery of modules

which has prerequisite of a following/subsequent module is highly recomended

4. All evidences during assessment (e.g. quiz, checklist, forms) should have a written form

that is compiled in the Trainer (source) and Trainee (result) portfolio. Portfolio is the

responsibility of School, Class Teacher, and Trainees. It should be given to trainees after

certification.

5. Industrial Attachment Program (IAP)

- For trainees It is advised to finish and be declared competent on the 30 hours

content of IAP module written in the curriculum before going to workplace or

industry.

- The school should organize visit for all trainees in the workplace or industry to

confirm and assist IAP especially in filling up the logbook.

- An interview to the trainee should be conducted in the school after the IAP has been

completed and should be documented in the trainee portfolio.

- All completed logbooks should be part of the trainee portfolio.

11 | P a g e

CompetenCom

petencece

C C M B P 4 0 1 - BUSINESS PLAN DEVELOPMENT

CCMBP401 Develop a business plan

REQF Level: 4 Learning hours

Credits: 3

Sector: All 30

Sub-sector: All


Purpose statement

This module covers the skills, knowledge and attitude to develop a business plan which is linked

to organizational strategic outcomes and facilitates the achievement of service delivery. The

module will allow the learner to identify elements of business plan, develop business plan in

Competence

12 | P a g e

line with the identified elements, establish strategies to monitor, evaluate and update the

business plan (Contingency plan) and present a business plan.

13 | P a g e

Learning assumed to be in place

Not applicable

Elements of competency and performance criteria

Learning units describe the essential outcomes of a competency.

Performance criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement

of the learning unit.

By the end of the module, the trainee will be able to:

Elements of competency Performance criteria

1. Identify elements of business plan 1.1 Proper analysis of business environment in accordance

with identified business idea.

1.2 Appropriate conduct of business feasibility study in line

with business environment analysis results

1.3 Correct definition of business plan elements

2. Write a business plan in line with the

identified elements

2.1 Proper description of the elements of a business plan in

accordance with business environment analysis results.

2.2 Proper design of business production plan in line with

results from business environment analysis

2.3 Clear design of marketing plan in line with market

feasibility study and business products

2.4 Accurate develop of business staffing requirement plan

in line with business activities

2.5 Proper design of business financial plan in line with

business needs

2. Establish strategies to monitor,

evaluate and update the

business plan- contingency plan

3.1 Clear identification of risk in accordance with business

environment

3.2 Accurate assessment of risk associated to the business in

line with the business plan developed

3.3 Clear explanation of business contingency plan concepts

3.4 Accurate development of contingency plan in

accordance of assessed risks

4. Present a business plan

1.1 Accurate preparation of business plan presentation in

accordance with business plan Clearly explain Clear

different ways to present the business plan

14 | P a g e

1.2 Appropriate presentation of a business plan

1.3 Present a business plan

15 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.1: Analyse business environment in accordance with identified business idea.

Meaning of business environment in

accordance with identified business

idea:

Business environment

Business situation

Explaining types of business environment.

Internal environment

Financial resources

Assets

Human resources

Technological resources

External environment

Suppliers of Inputs

Customers

Marketing Intermediaries

Competitors

Publics

Economic environment

Social and Cultural environment

Political and Legal environment

Technical environment

o Brainstorming

o Questions and answers

o Story telling

o Problem solving

o Role play

o Practical exercise

- Flipchart

- Marker pen

- Internet

- Reference books

- Case studies

- scenarios

- SWOT analysis

template

- Industry trends

analysis

template

Learning unit

LU 1: Identify elements of business plan.

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Analyze business environment in accordance with identified business idea.

2. Conduct business feasibility study in line with business environment analysis results

3. Define elements of business plan 4 Hours

Content Learning

activities

Resources

16 | P a g e

Demographical environment

Natural environment

Learning Outcome 1.1: Analyse business environment in accordance with identified business idea. (Cont’d)

Analyzing current industrial trends:

Industry rivalry (Degree of

competition among existing

firms)

Treat of substitutes (products

or services)

Bargaining power of buyers

Bargaining power of suppliers

Barriers to entry (threat of new

entrants)

Explaining SWOT analysis of the

business

o Brainstorming


o Story telling

o Problem solving

o Role play


- Flipchart

- Marker pen

- Internet

- Reference books

- Case studies

- scenarios

- SWOT analysis template

- Industry trends analysis

template

Formative Assessment 1.1

Assessor may collectamong the following evidences and make judgements on whether the performance

criterion has been achieved.

Types of evidence Portfolio assessment tools

Written evidence

Oral evidence

Product evidence

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist A produced industrial analysis

Content Learning

activities

Resources

Performance criterion

Proper analysis of business environment in accordance with identified

business idea.

17 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Business environment in accordance with identified business idea is analyzed

Business environment is defined

Business situation is defined

Indicator 2: Types of business environment are explained

Internal environment

Financial resources

Assets

Human resources

Technological resources

External environment

Suppliers of Inputs

Customers

Marketing Intermediaries

Competitors

Publics

Economic environment

Social and Cultural environment

Political and Legal environment

Technical environment

Demographical environment

Natural environment

Indicator 3: Current industrial trends analysis are applied

Industry rivalry (Degree of competition among existing firms)

Treat of substitutes (products or services)

Bargaining power of buyers

Bargaining power of suppliers

Barriers to entry (threat of new entrants)

Indicator 4: SWOT analysis of the business is explained

Observation

18 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.2: Conduct business feasibility study in line with business environment analysis results

Meaning of business feasibility study

Identifying the purpose of business

feasibility study.

Explaining the components of business

feasibility study:

Product feasibility

Market feasibility

Organizational feasibility

Financial feasibility

Recommendations and conclusion

Analyzing steps involved in feasibility

analysis:

Step 1. Conduct a preliminary

analysis

Step 2. Prepare a projected income

statement

Step 3. Conduct a market survey

Step 4. Plan business organization

and operations

Step 5. Prepare an opening day

balance sheet

Step 6. Review and analyze all data

Step 7. Make "go/no go" decision

o Brainstorming


o Problem solving

o Story telling


- Flipchart

- Marker pen

- Pen

- Internet

- Reference books

- Case studies

- scenarios

- Feasibility study

template





Written

Product evidence

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Appropriately conduct business feasibility study in line with business

environment analysis results

19 | P a g e

True or false questioning Sentence completion Problem solving A produced business feasibility study.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Business feasibility study in line with business environment analysis results are conducted

Meaning of business feasibility study

Purpose of business feasibility study

Indicator 2: Components of business feasibility study is explained

Product feasibility

Market feasibility




Indicator 3: Components of business feasibility study are identified

Product feasibility

Market feasibility




Indicator 3:

Indicator 4: Steps involved in feasibility analysis are explained

Step 1. Conduct a preliminary analysis

Step 2. Prepare a projected income statement

Step 3. Conduct a market survey

Step 4. Plan business organization and operations

Step 5. Prepare an opening day balance sheet

Step 6. Review and analyze all data

Step 7. Make "go/no go" decision

Observation

20 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.3:Define elements of business plan

Meaning of the term business plan

Differentiating business plan from project plan

Explaining the Importance of the business plan

Identifying the needs of the business plan: Internal use External use

Describing elements of business plan: Title/cover Page Executive Summary Description of the business Production plan Marketing plan Business staff plan Financial plan

Identifying risks associated to the business

Meaning of business risk Types of risks associated to

the business activities

o Brainstorming o Questions and answers o Story telling o Problem solving o Small group discussion

- Flipchart - Marker pen - Pen - Internet - Reference books - Case studies - scenarios


Assessor may collect among the following evidences and make judgements on whether the

performance criterion has been achieved.


Written Multiple choice exercises

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Correctly define elements of business plan

21 | P a g e

Performance

Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion

Checklist Score

Yes No Indicator 1: Elements of a business plan are explained

Meaning of the term business plan

Importance of the business plan

The needs of the business plan

Internal use

External use

Indicator2: Elements of business plan are identified

Title/cover Page Executive Summary

Description of the business

Production plan

Marketing plan Business staff plan

Financial plan

Indicator 3: Risks associated to the business are identified

Meaning of business risk

Types of risks associated to the business activities

Observation

22 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 2: Write a business plan in line with the identified elements

2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Describe the business plan 2. Design business production plan in line with results from business

environment analysis 3. Design marketing plan in line with market feasibility study and

business products 4. Design business staff in line with business activities 5. Develop business financial plan in line with business needs

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 2.1: Describe the business plan

Describing the elements of the business plan: Title Page

Business name Business logo Product mark Address Name of person who

developed the business In which month and year

plan is issued. Executive summary

the name and location of the business

Type of business to be done

the industry/market of the business

the uniqueness of the products/services and what proprietary rights of the business

o Oral presentation o Brainstorming o Questions and answers o Practical exercise

- Flipchart - Marker pen - Pen - Internet - Reference books - Case studies - Business plan template

Including questions that guiding trainee to write a business plan

Content Learning

activities

Resources

23 | P a g e

the current stage of development for the venture

the legal form of the organization and why

the key management personnel and what skills do they have that will help the business

Learning Outcome 2.1: Describe the business plan (Cont’d)

Executive summary (Cont’d) Projection of sales the break-even point Who is requesting the funds For what purpose are the funds

being requested the expected benefits of this

investment to your company funds repayment collateral to be used to secure a loan The business financial milestones

Description of the business The rationale of the business idea Structure of the business What is the type of the business

(Manufacturing? Services? Construction?

Business mission Business vision Business objectives Competitive advantage of the

business


- Flipchart - Marker pen - Pen - Internet - Reference books - Case studies - Business plan template

Including questions that guiding trainee to write a business plan


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper description of the business in accordance with business environment

analysis results

24 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral

Product

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist A produced business caver page and description of the

business.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Business plan is described

Title Page

Business name

Business logo

Product mark

Address

Name of person who developed the business

In which month and year plan is issued.

Executive summary

the name and location of the business

Type of business to be done

the industry/market of the business

the uniqueness of the products/services and what proprietary rights of the business



the legal form of the organization and why

the key management personnel and what skills do they have that will help the business

Projection of sales

the break-even

Who is requesting the funds

For what purpose are the funds being requested

the expected benefits of this investment to your company

funds repayment

collateral to be used to secure a loan

the business financial milestones

Description of the business are identified

The rationale of the business idea

Structure of the business

25 | P a g e

What is the type of the business (Manufacturing? Services? Construction?

Business mission

Business vision

Business objectives

Competitive advantage of the business

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.2: Design business production plan in line with results from business environment analysis

Designing business production plan

Identifying business premises and plant location

Location and reason of the choice

House or land for the production

Estimating required equipment and machinery types quality quantity for the production

Designing production planning process under which the production will pass through Estimating raw materials Identifying competing

technologies The technology to be used during

The production process technologies that should be

developed by other and affect your business


- Flipchart - Marker pen - Pen - Internet - Reference books - Case studies - Business plan

template Including questions that guiding trainee to write a business plan

Content Learning

activities

Resources

26 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 2.2: Design business production plan in line with results from business environment analysis (Cont’d)

Estimating Manufacturing and operations costs:

the cost of manufacturing Reduction of the manufacturing cost

Identifying the qualities control and ongoing service plan to avoid defects or

imperfections of products Monitoring or inspection that you

intend to build into the production process

strategies will you use to satisfy the customer changing preferences

Accomplishing labor requirements Types of workers needed during

production process the required skills of each workers

Designing production operations Identifying utilities and office

consumables needed in the production

Water Fuel Electricity

Identification of required packaging equipment

Types of materials that you will use to package your product

Source of supply and the quantity needed

The terms and conditions of suppliers

Explaining the importance of business production plan:

Customer service enhancement Inventory control Plant morale improvement Idle time reduction Quality improvement


- Flipchart - Marker pen - Pen - Internet - Reference books - Case studies - Business plan


Content Learning

activities

Resources

27 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral

Product

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist A produced production plan of the business.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1 : business production plan in line with results from business environment analysis is designed

The product is designed Business premises and plant location are identified Required equipment and machinery are estimated Production planning is designed Raw materials are estimated Competing technologies are identified Manufacturing and operations costs are estimated


Proper designing of business production plan in line with results from

business environment analysis

28 | P a g e

Quality control and ongoing service are identified Labor requirements are identified Production operations are identified Utilities and office consumables are identified Required packaging equipment are identified Importance of business product is explained

Indicator 2: The importance of business production plan is explained:

Customer service enhancement Inventory control Plant morale improvement Idle time reduction Quality improvement

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.3: Design marketing plan in line with market feasibility study and business products

Designing marketing plan: Market research (Customer description) Market analysis

Geographical location of the customers

The size of the different market segments?

The current and past trends affecting the market you plan to enter

Competition analysis Major competitors The SWOT of your competitors

Use their weakness to compete them

Strategy to address the threats Description of target market

Core customer Group of customers that made you to

start your business Defining marketing objectives

Market share

o Oral presentation

o Brainstorming



- Flipchart

- Marker pen

- Pen

- Internet

- Reference books

- Case studies

- Business plan

template Including

questions that

guiding trainee to

write a business

plan

Content Learning

activities

Resources

29 | P a g e

The level of sales Market intermediaries Explaining 5ps of marketing mix:

Product description: Price of products/services Place Promotion People

Learning Outcome 2.3: Design marketing plan in line with market feasibility study and business products (Cont’d)

Developing market strategies What will be the partners

of your business? How will you manage your

customers? How will you increase

market share? Ongoing marketing evaluation

What methods will you use to track customer satisfaction

What methods will you use to track the effectiveness of your marketing activities

What communication will you use to get feedback from customers

Elaborating marketing budget: What will be the cost of marketing activities

- Oral presentation

- Brainstorming

- Questions and answers

- Practical exercise

- Flipchart

- Marker pen

- Pen

- Internet

- Reference books

- Case studies

- Business plan

template Including

questions that guiding

trainee to write a

business plan


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Clearly design marketing plan in line with market feasibility study and

business products

30 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral

Product

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist A produced marketing plan of the business plan.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Marketing plan in line with market feasibility study and business products are designed

Market research Target market is identified Marketing objectives are set Product is described Price is set Place is identified Promotion is developed Market strategies are developed Ongoing marketing is evaluated Marketing budget is elaborated

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.4: Design business staff in line with business activities

Designing business staff in line with business activities

Job analysis What are the business activities?

Job description


- Flipchart - Marker pen - Pen - Internet - Reference books - Case studies

Content Learning

activities

Resources

31 | P a g e

How each task will be performed?

Job specifications: What are the performances requirements to a specific task? Organizational structure:

What is the hierarchy of the staff

- Business plan template Including questions that guiding trainee to write a business plan





Written evidence

Oral

Product

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist A produced developed business staff.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: business staff in line with business activities is designed

Job analysis designed

Job description designed

Job specifications designed

Organizational structure designed

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.5: Develop business financial plan in line with business needs


Accurately develop business requirements in terms of staffing in line with

business activities

32 | P a g e

Develop business financial plan in line with business needs

Estimating total cost Establishing start-up

requirements plan: Cost items (what are the

cost items your business will need in its first year of implementation

Cost: how much each item cost?

Source of funds: what are the source of fund; what is the share owner?

Projected cash flow statement for the first three years.

What is the estimated profit in three years?

Details Period of twelve months

Projected Income: profit & loss statement for the first three years

Projected balance sheet for the first three years. Liquidity ratio: Debt Equity ratio Return of investment ratio

Calculating breakeven point Calculating payback period: Projected sales plan Loan payment plan


- Flipchart - Marker pen - Pen - Internet - Reference

books - Case studies - Business plan






Content Learning

activities

Resources


Properly design business financial plan in line with business needs

33 | P a g e

Written evidence

Oral

Product

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist A produced business financial plan.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Business financial plan in line with business needs are developed Total cost is estimated Start-up requirements plan is established Income (Profit & Loss) statement for the first three years is projected Balance sheet for the first three years is projected Cash flow statement for the first three years is projected Liquidity ratio is calculated Debt equity ratio is calculated Return of investment ratio is calculated Breakeven point is calculated Payback period is calculated Projected sales is planned Loan payment is planned

Observation

34 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.1: Analyse risk in accordance with business environment

Analyzing risk in accordance with business environment

Importance of risk analysis Describe steps involved in

risk analysis. Identify the risk Analyze the risk Evaluate /rank the risk Treat the risk Monitor and review the

risk Threats identification tools:

SWOT Analysis PESTEL Analysis

Estimate risks (Quantitative Qualitative)

Risk estimation tools: Risk impact chart Probability chart

o Oral presentation

o Brainstorming



- Flipchart

- Marker pen

- Pen

- Internet

- Reference books

- Case studies

- Risk analysis

template

U 3:Establish strategies to monitor evaluate and update the business plan (Contingency plan).

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Analyze risk in accordance with business environment 2. Assess identified risks in accordance with business plan

developed 3. Explain business contingency plan concepts 4. Development contingency plan in accordance of assessed risks

3 Hours

Content Learning

activities

Resources

35 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Risk in accordance with business environment is analyzed

Importance of risk analysis is explained

Risk analysis is explained

Steps involved in risk analysis are explained

Observation


Clearly identify risk in accordance with business environment

36 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.2: Assess identified risks in accordance with business plan developed

Explaining factors influencing risks

assessment

SWOT analysis

What factors are critical for

the success of your plan?

What risk does your plan

should face?

Analyze the source of the

risk, the probability of it

happening and the effects

What are the mitigation

measures to avoid these

risks?

Define operational plan

PESTEL analysis

What factors are critical

for the success of your

plan in relation with

politics, economy, social,

technological,

environment and legal

What measures can you

take to avoid these risks


o Brainstorming

o Oral presentation

o Small group discussion

o Documentary research

o Internet research



- Flipchart

- Markers

- Pen

- Internet

- Reference books

- Case studies

- Business plan

- Computer





Written evidence

Oral


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Accurately assess risk associated to the business in line with the business

plan developed

37 | P a g e

True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Assess identified risks in accordance with business plan are developed

Factors influencing risks assessment are identified

SWOT is analyzed Critical factors for the success of the plan are identified

Risks associated to the business are identified

Source of the risk, the probability of its happening and the effects are explained

What measures can you take to avoid these risks?


PESTEL analysis

What factors are critical for the success of your plan in relation with politics,

economy, social, technological, environment and legal

Mitigation measures to avoid the risks are described

Operational plan is defined

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.3: Explain business contingency plan concepts

Explaining business contingency

plan concepts

Definition of business contingency

plan

Purpose of contingency plan

Importance of contingency

plan:

o Brainstorming on identifying

meaning of key words

o Oral presentation




o Internet research

- Flipchart

- Markers

- Pen

- Internet

- Reference books

- Case studies

- Business plan

- Computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources

38 | P a g e

Reduces the Risk of uncertainty. Future is unpredictable. ...

Continuity of Work. ... Increases credit

availability. ... Prevents Panic.

Steps of business contingency

plan:

Develop the contingency planning policy statement. ...

Conduct the business impact analysis (BIA). ...

Identify preventive controls. ...

Create contingency strategies. ...

Develop an information system contingency plan. ...

Ensure plan testing, training, and exercises. ...

Ensure plan maintenance.





Written evidence

Oral

Product

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist A produced schedule

Checklist Score

Yes No


Briefly explain business contingency plan concepts

39 | P a g e

Indicator : business contingency plan concepts are explained Business Contingency plan is defined

Purpose of contingency plan is stated

Importance of contingency plan is explained

Steps of business contingency plan are illustrated

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.4: Development of contingency plan in accordance of assessed risks

Identifying Steps involved in contingency

plan

Identifying requirements related to

specific contingency plan

Cost Calculation of identified

requirements

Appreciation of company capacity

to cover identified risks

Decide choice to undertake

Adaptation

Complementarity

Abandon

Creating specific strategies to make the

contingency plan operational

Describe the risk statement

Define the protocol

o Brainstorming

o Oral presentation



o Internet research



- Flipchart

- Markers

- Pen

- Internet

- Reference books

- Case studies

- Role play scenarios

- Business plan

- Computer





Content Learning

activities

Resources


Accurately develop contingency plan in accordance of assessed risks

40 | P a g e

Written evidence

Oral

Product

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist A produced contingency

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Development of contingency plan in accordance of assessed risks are explained

Steps involved in contingency plan Requirements related to specific contingency plan are identified

Cost of identified requirements are calculated

Company capacity to cover risks identified is appreciated

Choice to undertake is decided

Indicator 2: Specific strategies to make the contingency plan operational is created

Risk statement is described

The protocol is defined

Observation

41 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 4: Present a business plan

4

Learning Outcomes:

1. Explain different ways to present the business plan 2. Explain different ways to present the business plan 3. Present a business plan

3 Hours

Learning Outcome 4.1: Explain different ways to present the business plan

Describing the purpose of business plan

presentation Financing support Strategic orientation Attracting investors

Explaining the types of business plan presentation preparation: Content preparation Material preparation Psychological preparation

Identifying the steps involved in preparation of business plan presentation

Analyze your audience Select a topic Define the objective of the presentation

of business plan. Prepare the body of the business plan to

be presented and anticipate the questions from audience

Prepare the suggestions and conclusion. Practice delivering the presentation of

business plan

Presentation of the content Business idea

o Brainstorming




- Flipchart

- Markers

- Pen

- Internet

- Reference books

- Case studies

- play scenarios

- Computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources

42 | P a g e

Market Marketing strategy





Written evidence

Oral

Product

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist A produced presentation of business plan

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Purpose of business plan presentation is described

Financing support

Strategic orientation

Attracting investors

Indicator 2: Types of required business plan presentation preparation are explained Content preparation

Material preparation Psychological preparation

Indicator 3: Steps involved in preparation of business plan presentation are identified The audience analyzed

The topic is selected The objective of the presentation of business plan is defined

The body of the business plan to be presented is prepared and the questions from audience are anticipated

Suggestions and conclusion are prepared

Delivering the presentation of business plan is practiced


Accurately prepare of business plan presentation in accordance with business

plan

43 | P a g e

Indicator 4: The business plan content is presented

Business idea Market

Marketing strategy

Observation


Learning Outcome 4.2: Explain different ways to present the business plan

Defining parties to present the business

plan:

shareholders

stakeholders

Explaining procedures involved in

business plan presentation:

Connect with your audience

Business like

Simple language

Presentation touch at a

personal level

Paint a picture in your

audience’ minds

Pick out great images and

visual

Lasting impression

Put credibly content

Use statistics and data

Charts

Graph

o Brainstorming Questions

and answers


o Role play

- Flipchart

- Markers

- Pen

- Internet

- Reference books

- Case studies

- scenarios

- Computer

- Internet

Content Learning

activities

Resources

44 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist

Checklist Score

Yes No Indicator 1: Different parties to present the business plan are explained

Shareholders

Stakeholders

Indicator 2 : Procedures involved in business plan presentation are explained

Connect with your audience

Business like

Simple language

Presentation touch at a personal level

Paint a picture in your audience’ minds

Pick out great images and visual

Lasting impression

Put credibly content

Use statistics and data

Observation


Clearly explain different ways to present the business plan

45 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 4.3: Present a business plan

Explaining techniques to present your business plan Only write key points Don’t read them, speak about

them Use visualization, pictures,

symbols, colours, tables Short, concise, come to the point,

not more than 10 min. React positive to questions Use body language, voice,

appearance Try to convince Integrating comments,

suggestions and remarks in the business plan

Planning to maintain and enforce relationship with stakeholders (audience) for further collaboration

o Brainstorming o Small group discussion o Questions and answers o Role play

o Internet o Reference books o Case studies o scenarios o Computer





Written evidence

Oral

Performance

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning Sentence completion Observation checklist Video Photos

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Appropriately present a business plan

46 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator :Techniques to present your business plan are explained

write key points

Integrating comments, suggestions and remarks in the business plan is explained

Planning to maintain and enforce relationship with stakeholders (audience) for

further collaboration is explained

Use body language,

Don’t read them, speak about them

Use visualization, pictures, symbols, colors, tables

Short, concise, come to the point, not more than 10 min.

React positive to questions

Observation

References:

1. Omagor, P. a. (2010). Entrepreneurship education for advanced level students.

2. Ssempijja, M. (2011). Entrepreneurship education for advanced level and business institutions,

third edition. Uganda: Kyambogo University.

3. SANGSTER, F. W. (2005). Bussiness accounting, tenth edition. UK: Pearson Education Limited.

4. Read more: http://www.businessdictionary.com/definition/breakeven-point.html

http://www.businessdictionary.com/definition/breakeven-point.html

47 | P a g e

Competecnce

Ccompetennn

C C M C S 4 0 1 - COMPUTER SKILLS

CCMCS401 Apply Computer Skills


Credits: 3 30

Sector: All

Sub-sector: All


Purpose statement

The use of ICT in several areas has grown appreciably in recent years. ICT products are now used by most people, ranging from mobile phones and digital TVs through to personal computers and the World Wide Web. This qualification focuses on providing skills, experience and confidence for those learners who struggle to make the most of technology to demonstrate creative thinking, problem solving and knowledge construction. It focuses on completing workplace tasks, such as creating documents with text, graphics and numerical information using commonly used tools such as: Microsoft Office – Excel, PowerPoint. Also the leaner will have the skills on how to protect the data in the computer systems.

48 | P a g e

Learning assumed to be in place Not applicable







1. Describe the operating

system

1.1 Proper introduction of operating system

1.2 Proper description of operating system components

1.3 Proper description of operating system types

1.4 proper description of operating system file system

2. Customize the computer

features

2.1 Proper identification of customer requirements for an

operating system

2.2 Proper Identification of Minimum Hardware Requirements

for operating system to be used

2.3 Proper customization of operating system

3. Protect computer system

3.1 Proper installation of software utilities according to the

manufacturer specifications

3.2 Regular scanning of computer and elimination of virus as per

safety standards

3.3 Accurate backup and restoration of computer data based on

OS installation

49 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 2: Describe the operating system

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Introduce the operating system 2. Describe the components of operating system 3. Describe the types of operating system 4. Describe the operating system file system

15 Hours

Learning Outcome 1.1: Introduce the operating system

Introduction to operating system Definition Features

Basic functions of operating system Intermediator Process Management File Management Memory

Management Security Job Scheduling

Brainstorming on operating system

Group discussions on basic functions of operating system

- Computer - Projector - Whiteboard - Marker - Duster - Internet


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper introduction of an operating system

50 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation)

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Operating system is introduced Definition Features Indicator: Basic functions of operating system are described Intermediator Process Management File Management Memory Management Security Job Scheduling

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.2:Describe components of operating system

User interface Graphical user interface

(GUI). Shell(CLI)

Kernel micro kernel monolithic kernel

o Demonstration on components of operating system

o Group discussions on

components of operating

system

- Computer - Projector - Whiteboard - Marker - Duster - Internet

Content Learning

activities

Resources

51 | P a g e

File management system Disk-based Network-based Virtual





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation )

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: User interface is described

Graphical user interface (GUI).

Shell(CLI)

Indicator: kernel is described

Micro kernel

Monolithic kernel

Indicator : File management system is described

Disk-based

Network-based

Virtual

Observation


Proper description of components of operating system

52 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.3: Describe the types of operating system

Single-user, single task Android Blackberry iOS(iPhone OS) Windows 8 phone

Multi-user, multi-task Unix Lunix

Real Time Operating Systems

Industrial machine Laboratories

machine

Single-user, Multi-tasking Windows xp Windows vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 10 Mac OS

o Group discussions on types of operating system

- Computer - Projector - Internet





Written evidence

Oral evidence


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper description of operating system types

53 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Single-user, single task operating system are described

Android

Blackberry iOS(iPhone OS) Windows 8 phone

Indicator : Multi-user, multi-task operating system are described Unix Lunix

Indictor: Real Time Operating Systems operating system are described Industrial machine Laboratories machine

Indicator : Single-user, Multi-tasking operating system are described Windows xp Windows vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 10

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.4: Describe the operating system file system

File system role

File system types File Allocation Table (FAT12,

FAT16,FAT32,exFAT) New Technology File System

(NTFS). Apple file system (APFS) Hierarchical file system (HFS

and HFS Plus) Veritas File System(VFS)

o Brainstorming on file system

role

o Group discussion on file

system types

- Computer with OS installed

- Projector - Whiteboard - Marker - Duster - Internet


Content Learning

activities

Resources

54 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator : File system types are described

File Allocation Table(FAT12,FAT16,FAT32,exFAT) New Technology File System (NTFS). Apple file system (APFS) Hierarchical file system(HFS and HFS Plus) Veritas File System(VFS)

Observation


Proper description of operating system file system

55 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 3: Customize computer features

2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Identify the customer requirements for an operating system 2. Identify the minimum hardware requirements for operating system

for operating system to be used 3. Customize the operating system

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 2.1:Identify the customer requirements for an operating system

Requirements to be

considered

Budget constraints

Compatibility with

current hardware

Compatibility with

new hardware

How the computers

will be used

Compatibility with

existing applications

Types of new

applications to be

used

o Brainstorming on operating system customer requirements

o Group discussions on operating system customer requirements

o Demonstration on operating

system customer requirements

- Computer - Projector - Internet


Content Learning

activities

Resources

56 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Customer requirement for an operating system are identified

Budget constraints

Compatibility with current hardware

Compatibility with new hardware

How the computers will be used

Compatibility with existing applications

Types of new applications to be used

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.2: Identify minimum hardware requirements for operating system to be used

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper identification of customer requirements for an operating system

57 | P a g e

Possible hardware upgrades RAM capacity Hard drive size CPU Video card memory and

speed Motherboard

o Group discussions on minimum hardware requirements

- Computers - Projector - Internet





Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Possible hardware upgrades are identified

RAM capacity

Hard drive size

CPU

Video card memory and speed

Motherboard

Observation


Proper identification of minimum hardware requirements for operating system to be used

58 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 2.3:Customize the operating system

User account creation

computer and windows explorer

Manage user account

Manage disk drives

Manage windows services

Schedule tasks with Task Scheduler

Check system events with Event Viewer

Verify your network shares with Shared Folders

Control panel utilities

o Brainstorming on operating system customization

o Demonstration on operating system customization

o Practical exercises on operating system customization

- Computers with OS installed

- Projector - Internet





Written evidence

Oral evidence


Performance Performance checklist

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: operating system is customized

User account creation

computer and windows explorer

Manage user account

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper customization of the operating system

59 | P a g e

Manage disk drives

Manage windows services

Schedule tasks with Task Scheduler

Check system events with Event Viewer

Observation

60 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU3: Protect computer system

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Install software utilities 2. Scan and Eliminate virus 3. Backup and restore of computer data based on OS

5 Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1:Install software utilities

Description of software tools utilities Anti-virus Anti-malware Anti-spyware Adware Backup software Backup media

Installation of software tools\utilities Anti-virus Anti-malware Anti-spyware Adware Backup software Backup media

o Brainstorming on security software

o Group discussion on computer security

o Practical exercise on antivirus

installation

- Computer Lab with internet access

- Projector - White Board - Markers - Projector - Computer with OS

installed - Antivirus


Content Learning

activities

Resources

61 | P a g e




Written or Oral



Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Software tools utilities are described

Anti-virus

Anti-malware

Anti-spyware

Adware

Backup software

Backup media

Indicator: Software tools utilities are installed

Anti-virus

Anti-malware

Anti-spyware

Adware

Backup software

Backup media

Observation


Proper installation of software utilities according to the manufacturer

specifications

62 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.2: Scan and Eliminate virus

Description of scan types Full system scan On demand scan On access scan

Description of scan mode Manual Automatic Scheduled

Virus elimination Elimination by neutralization Elimination by deleting Elimination by quarantine

o Presentation on computer virus scan types

o Brainstorming on computer virus scan

o Practical exercises on

computer virus scan


- Projector - Computer with OS

installed - Antivirus - White Board - Markers





Written



Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Scan type are described

Full system scan

On demand scan

On access scan

Indicator: Scan mode is described

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Regular computer scan and elimination of virus as per safety standards

63 | P a g e

Manual

Automatic

Scheduled

Indicator: Virus are eliminated

Neutralization

Deleting

Quarantine

Observation

64 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.3: Backup and restore of computer data based on OS

Selection of backup types Normal/Full backup Copy backup Differential backup Incremental backup Daily backups

Selection of common backup devices Tape drive Digital audio

tape(DAT) drives Auto-loader tape

systems Magnetic optical

drives Removable disks Disk drives

Selection common restore devices HHD/SSD USB/ Flash Driver Tapes drives Magnetic optical

drives CDs DVDs Disc drives

o Brainstorming on backup types o Practical exercises on backup o Practical exercises on restore


- Projector - Computer with OS

installed - White Board - Markers - HHD/SSD - USB/ Flash Driver - Tapes drives - Magnetic optical drives - CDs - DVDs - Disc drives





Written evidence

Oral

Performance

Matching Sentence completion Ticking

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Accurate backup and restore of computer data based on OS installation

65 | P a g e

Expose (presentation ) Task on backing up data

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Backup types are described

Normal/Full backup

Copy backup

Differential backup

Incremental backup

Daily backups

Indicator: Common backup devices are selected

Tape drive

Digital audio tape(DAT) drives

Auto-loader tape systems

Magnetic optical drives

Removable disks

Disk drives

Indicator: Common restore devices are selected

Tape drive

Digital audio tape(DAT) drives

Auto-loader tape systems

Magnetic optical drives

Removable disks

Disk drives

Observation

References:

1. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/283778784_Introduction_to_Operating_System

2. https://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/teaching/1011/OpSystems/os1a-slides.pdf

3. https://www.ukessays.com/essays/computer-science/classification-of-operating-systems-ii-

computer-science-essay.php

4. https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/backup-and-restore-in-windows-352091d2-bb9d-

3ea3-ed18-52ef2b88cbef

5. https://cce.sydney.edu.Sau/course/BCEI

https://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/teaching/1011/OpSystems/os1a-slides.pdf

https://www.ukessays.com/essays/computer-science/classification-of-operating-systems-ii-computer-science-essay.php

https://www.ukessays.com/essays/computer-science/classification-of-operating-systems-ii-computer-science-essay.php

https://cce.sydney.edu.sau/course/BCEI

66 | P a g e

Competence

C C M E N 4 0 1 - INTERMEDIATE WORKPLACE ENGLISH

CCMEN401 Use intermediate English at the workplace


Credits: 3 30

Sector: All

Sub-sector: All

Issue date: September, 2021

Purpose statement

This module describes the skills, knowledge and attitudes to be acquired for level four trainees. The trainee will be able to present personal ideas and opinions, discuss selected topics of interest, build a convincing argument to support or refute an opinion, support or refute an idea in a debate/discussion, use proper terminology to report facts, describe, explain and state facts , use tenses accurately, write structured factual, descriptive and explanatory texts on a range of topics, produce correspondence texts stating, describe facts in the workplace, produce small scale-reports on trade-related issues, read medium texts on general and trade-related topics, identify different reading techniques, select and apply reading techniques to different texts, draw inferences from medium-length texts ,Identify listening strategies, select appropriate listening

67 | P a g e

strategy depending on the listening purpose, apply listening strategies while listening to audio messages use nonverbal clues to detect messages implied by the speaker.

Module prerequisites

Pre- intermediate workplace English







1. Write factual, descriptive, and

explanatory texts

1.1 Effective use of proper terminology to report facts 1.2 Correct use of tenses to describe, explain and state

facts accurately 1.3 Clear distinction of factual, description and

explanatory paragraphs 1.4 Appropriate writing of well-structured descriptive,

factual, and explanatory texts on a range of topics 1.5 Accurate production of correspondence texts (letters,

emails) stating, explaining, or describing facts at the workplace

1.6 Appropriate redaction of small-scale reports on trade-related issues (field visits, industrial attachments)

2. Apply a range of listening strategies

to understand predictable

messages

2.1 Accurate identification of different listening strategies

2.2 Proper selection of a listening strategy depending on the listening purpose

2.3 Active application of listening strategies while listening to audio messages

2.4 Adequate use of non-verbal clues (intonation, tone, body movement) to detect messages implied by the speaker

3. Discuss general and trade-related

topics

3.1 Proper presentations of personal ideas and opinions during discussions of selected topics of interest

3.2 Proper detection and avoidance of argumentation fallacies in debates and discussions

3.3 Adequate building of arguments to support or refute an opinion (elements and types of an argument

68 | P a g e


4. Read medium texts on general and

trade-related topics

4.1 Accurate identification of different reading techniques (skimming, scanning, extensive reading, critical reading)

4.2 Proper selection of a reading technique depending on the reading purpose and material

4.3 Active application of reading techniques while reading different texts messages

4.4 Proper demonstration of the ability to understand the inferences made in a range of medium length texts

69 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 1: Write factual, descriptive, and explanatory texts.

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Use proper terminology to report facts 2. Describe, explain and state facts using tenses accurately 3. Distinguish factual, description and explanatory paragraphs 4. Write well-structured factual, descriptive, and explanatory texts on a

range of topics 5. Production of correspondence texts (letters, emails) stating,

explaining, or describing facts at the workplace 6. Produce small-scale reports on trade-related issues (field visits,

industrial attachments)

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 1.1:Use proper terminology to report facts

Expressing facts

Expressions used in

outlining facts

The fact is that…

The (main) point is

that …

This proves that …

What it comes down to

is that …

It is obvious that …

It is certain that …

One can say that …

It is clear that…

There is no doubt that …

Comparing and reporting facts

Using comparatives and

superlatives

Quantifiers and modifiers

o Group discussions

o Dialogues

o Role plays

o Short presentations

o Practical writing exercises

o Modelling

Projector

Computer

Flipcharts

Markers

Scenarios

Trainee

manuals

Stationeries

Lesson plans

Reference

books

Written

speeches

Newspaper

reports


Content Learning

activities

Resources

70 | P a g e




Written evidence

Performance evidence

Presentations

Sentence completion

Matching

Writing practice

Task: Using comparatives and superlatives, report key information

facts at your workplace.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator : Expressions are well used in outlining facts

The fact is that…

The (main) point is that …

This proves that …

What it comes down to is that …

It is obvious that …

It is certain that …

One can say that …

It is clear that…

There is no doubt

Indicator: Comparing and reporting facts are well used

Using comparatives and superlatives

Quantifiers and modifiers

Observation


Appropriate use of proper terminologies to report facts

71 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.2: Describe, explain and state facts using tenses accurately

Using present tenses to

describe, explain and state

present facts

Simple present

Present continuous

Present perfect

Present perfect

continuous

Using past tenses to

describe, explain and state

past facts

Simple past

Past continuous

Past perfect

Past perfect continuous

o Dialogues

o Storytelling


o Practical writing

exercises

o Modelling

o Brainstorming

o Vocabulary Games

Audiovisual materials

Projector

Computer

Flipcharts

Markers

Lesson plans

Recordings

Reference books

Photos or pictures

Written speeches

Newspaper reports





Written

Performance

Writing practice

Discussions

Matching

Task: Describe present facts about your career using appropriate

tenses

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator : Present tenses are well used to describe , to explain and state facts

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Describe, explain and state facts using tenses accurately

72 | P a g e

Simple present

Present continuous

Present perfect

Present perfect continuous

Indicator : Past tenses are well used to describe , to explain and state facts

Simple past

Past continuous

Past perfect

Past perfect continuous

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.3: Distinguish descriptive, factual and explanatory paragraphs

Descriptive paragraph

Paragraph arrangement Sensory details Precise language Dominant impression Figurative language and

compelling adjectives.

Factual paragraph Paragraph arrangement Factual description

Explanatory paragraph Paragraph arrangement Transitions Evidences and examples

o Group discussions

o Brainstorming

o Group works

-Newspapers -Books -Written speeches

Content Learning

activities

Resources

73 | P a g e





Written

Oral

Writing practice

Discussions

Matching

True or false questions

Task: Classify the paragraphs given to you by the teacher according

to their types

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Characteristics of a descriptive paragraph are well distinguished

Paragraph arrangement

Sensory details

Precise language

Dominant impression

Figurative language and compelling adjectives.

Indicator: Characteristics of a factual paragraph are well distinguished


Factual description

Indicator: Characteristics of a explanatory paragraph are well distinguished


Transitions

Evidences and examples

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.4: Write well-structured factual, descriptive, and explanatory texts on a range of topics

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Clear distinction of descriptive, factual and explanatory paragraphs

74 | P a g e

Sentence structure

Compound sentences

Coordinative

conjunction

Complex sentences

Main clauses

Subordinate clause

Subordinate

conjunctions

Compound complex

sentences

Text structure

Narrative text

Argumentative text

Descriptive text

Explanatory texts

o Group works

o Pair work

o Jumbled paragraphs

o Gap-fill

Audiovisual

materials

Projector

Computer

Flipcharts

Markers

Lesson plans

Recordings

Reference books

Photos or pictures





Written

Matching

Writing practice Presentation Task: Write a short essay describing your career dreams

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Sentences are well-structured


Write well-structured factual, descriptive, and explanatory texts on a

range of topics

75 | P a g e

Compound sentences

Complex sentences

Compound complex sentences

Indicator:The text is well-structured

Narrative text

Argumentative text

Descriptive text

Explanatory texts

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.5: Production of correspondence texts (letters, emails) stating, explaining, or describing facts at the workplace

Introduction to business letters

Parts of a business letter

Introduction to email

correspondence

Parts of an email

Strategies for writing a good

email

Write a meaningful subject

line

Keep the message focused

Proofread

Show respect and restraint

o Pair work

o Jumbled paragraphs

o Gap-fill

o Peer feedback


email writing


business letters

Audiovisual

materials

Projector

Computer

Flipcharts

Markers

Lesson plans

Recordings

Reference books

Photos or pictures

Letter samples

Content Learning

activities

Resources

76 | P a g e


Assessor may collecta3mong the following evidences and make judgements on whether the



Written

Performance

Writing practice Task: Compose an email outlining some of the challenges you

face at work.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Parts of business letters are well placed and recognized

Sender’s address

Date

Receiver’s address

The salutation

Re

The body

The complimentary close

The signature

Indicator: Parts of an email are well placed

Recipient's Address

Cc and Bcc

Subject Line

Body

Sender’s address

Send

Indicator: Strategies for writing a good email are well applied

Write a meaningful subject line

Keep the message focused

Proofread

Show respect and restraint

Observation


Accurate production of correspondence texts (letters, emails) stating,

explaining, or describing facts at the workplace

77 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.6: Produce small-scale reports on trade-related issues (field visits, industrial attachments)

Writing small-scale reports Structure of a formal

report Layout Introduction Body Conclusion

o Report Writing practice o Peer feedback o Group work


Projector

Computer

Flipcharts

Markers

Lesson plans

Reference books

Sample reports





Written

Writing practice

Presentation Task: Produce a short report on your recent field visit

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator : Formal report is well structured

Layout

Introduction

Body

Conclusion

Language is well used

Observation

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Accurate production of small-scale reports on trade-related issues (field

visits, industrial attachments)

78 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 2: Apply a range of listening strategies to understand predictable messages.

2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Identify different listening strategies 2. Select appropriate listening strategy depending on the listening

purpose 3. Apply listening strategies while listening to audio messages 4. Use non-verbal clues to detect messages implied by the speaker

7 Hours

Learning Outcome 2.1:Identify different listening strategies

Listening strategies

Listening for details

Listening for the gist

Note taking

Active listening and

response

Listening for specific

information

Predicting

Drawing inferences

Summarizing

Recognizing cognates

Recognizing word-order

patterns

o Dialogues

o Role plays


o Modelling and drilling

o Listening to TV shows

o Listening to radio programs


Projector

Computer

Flipcharts

Markers

Lesson plans

Recordings

Reference books

Written speeches

Newspaper reports

Scenarios




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Identify different listening strategies

79 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Discussions

Presentations

Multiple choice

Listening practice Task: List and explain at least three listening strategies.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Listening strategies are explained

Listening for details

Listening for the gist

Note taking

Active listening and response

Listening for specific information

Summarizing

Predicting

Drawing inferences

Recognizing cognates

Recognizing word-order patterns

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.2: Select appropriate listening strategy depending on the listening purpose

Refer to Learning Outcome 2.1 Refer to Learning Outcome 2.1 Refer to Learning Outcome 2.1


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Appropriate selection of listening strategy depending upon the listening

purpose

80 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Discussions

Presentations

Multiple choice

Listening practice Task: Which listening strategy would you use to get the main

idea of a recording?

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Listening strategies are well selected Listening for details listening for the gist note taking Active listening and response Listening for specific information Summarizing predicting drawing inferences recognizing cognates recognizing word-order patterns

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.3: Apply listening strategies while listening to audio messages


Content Learning

activities

Resources

81 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Discussions

Multiple choice

Listening practice Task: listen to the audio and find out the main idea and

answer question of comprehension on it

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: The audio is well interpreted Main points are given Questions of comprehension are answered The message from the audio is clear and focus on the topic

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.4: Use non-verbal clues to detect messages implied by the speaker

Understanding non-verbal

clues

Voice clues Intonation Voice tone

Body movement Facial expressions

o Role play o Video watching o Note taking o Modelling o Drilling

Video materials

Posters/banners

Wallpapers


Projector

Flipcharts

Markers

Lesson plans

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Accurate application of listening strategies while listening to audio messages

82 | P a g e

Gestures Recordings

Reference books

Scenarios

Trainee manuals





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice Discussions

Audio-visual practice Task: Watch a video shown by the teacher and say what the

speaker’s gestures mean.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Non -verbal clues are well used to detect the message implied by the speaker Voice clues Body movement

Observation


Appropriate use of non-verbal clues to detect messages implied by the

speaker

83 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 3: Discuss general and trade-related topics.

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Present personal ideas and opinions during discussions on selected topics of interest

2. Detect and avoid argumentation fallacies in debates and discussions 3. Build convincing arguments to support or refute an opinion

7 Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1:Present personal ideas and opinions during discussions on selected topics of interest

Expressing opinion in English

Agreeing to an opinion

Full agreement to an

opinion

Partial agreement to an

opinion

Disagreeing to an opinion

Forms of disagreement

When to disagree

Disagreeing politely

Using functional language in

argument building

Persuasion

Asking questions

Cause and effect

Summarizing ideas to be

refuted

Sequencing ideas

Predicting ideas

o Dialogues o Role plays o Modelling o Group discussions o Debates o Mock speeches


Projector

Computer

Flipcharts

Markers

Lesson plans

Recordings

Reference books

Written speeches

Newspaper reports

Scenarios

Trainee manual

Content Learning

activities

Resources

84 | P a g e





Oral evidence

Performance

Presentation practice

Writing practice

Discussions Task: Prepare a short presentation on a topic of interest and

share it with your class.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Ideas and opinions are well presented during discussions

Agreeing with an opinion

Disagreeing with an opinion

Indicator: Functional language in argument building is well used

Persuasion

Asking questions

Cause and effect

Summarizing ideas to be refuted

Sequencing ideas

Predicting ideas

Observation


Proper presentation of personal ideas and opinions during discussions on

selected topics of interest

85 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.2: Detect and avoid argumentation fallacies in debates and discussions

Dealing with argumentation

fallacies Types of Fallacies

Formal Fallacies

Propositional fallacies

Quantification fallacies

Formal syllogistic fallacies Informal Fallacies

Faulty generalizations

Red herring fallacies Conditional fallacies

Responding to fallacies

o Dialogues

o Role plays

o Modelling and drilling

Video materials

Posters/banners

Wallpapers


Projector

Computer

Flipcharts

Markers

Lesson plans

Recordings

Reference books





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice Discussions Listening practice Note taking Presentation Task: Listen to the recording played to you by the teacher and

tell which argumentation fallacies the speaker is using then respond to them.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Argumentation fallacies are well identified and responded to during listening Formal Fallacies Informal Fallacies Conditional fallacies

Observation

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper detection and avoid argumentation fallacies in debates and

discussions

86 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.3: Build convincing arguments to support or refute an opinion

Building a convincing argument Definition of an argument Elements of an argument

Claims Counterclaims Reasons Evidence

Types of arguments Deductive Argument Inductive Argument Abductive

o Debates o Group discussions o Brainstorming o Presentations o Mock speeches

Video materials

Posters/banners

Wallpapers


Projector

Flipcharts

Lesson plans

Recordings

Reference books

Speech samples





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Discussions Writing practice Presentation Task: After drafting your argument on the role of TVET on

Rwanda’s development, indicate all the elements of an argument in it.

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Accurate building convincing arguments to support or refute an opinion

87 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: a convincing argument is defined and well built Definition of an argument

Elements of argument

Claims

Counterclaims

Reasons

Evidence

Indicator: Types of arguments are considered

Deductive Argument

Inductive Argument

Abductive

Observation

88 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU4: Read medium texts on general and trade-related topics.

4

Learning Outcomes:

1. Identify different reading techniques

2. Select a reading technique depending on the reading purpose

and material

3. Apply reading techniques while reading different texts

4. Demonstrate ability to understand the inferences made in a

range of medium length texts

6 Hours

Learning Outcome 4.1:Identify different reading techniques

Definition of Reading

techniques

Skimming

Scanning

Deep reading

Critical reading

o Practical exercises

o Debating texts read

o Presentations on texts

read

o Group discussions

Projector

Computer

Flipcharts

Markers

Lesson plans

Reference books

Written speeches

Newspaper reports

Reading materials




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper identification of different reading techniques

89 | P a g e


Written evidence

Performance

Reading practice

Multiple choice

True and false questions

Presentations Task: Differentiate reading techniques

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Reading techniques are differentiated

Skimming

Scanning

Deep reading

Critical reading

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.2: Select a reading technique depending on the reading purpose and material






Written evidence

Performance

Reading practice

Multiple choice

True and false questions

Presentations

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Adequate reading techniques depending on the purpose

90 | P a g e

Task: Select an appropriate reading strategy based on the reading task given to you by the teacher.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Selection of reading strategy is understood according to its purpose Skimming

Scanning

Deep reading

Critical reading

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.3: Apply reading techniques while reading different texts

Applying reading techniques to

texts

General texts

Trade-related texts


o Debating texts read

o Presentations on texts

read

o Group discussions

Projector

Computer

Flipcharts

Markers

Lesson plans

Reference books

Written speeches

Newspaper

reports

Reading materials

Reference books


Content Learning

activities

Resources

91 | P a g e




Written evidence

Performance

Reading practice

Presentations Task: Read a text and apply reading strategy based on the task

given to you by the teacher.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Reading strategies are applied according to the purpose Look only for a specific fact or piece of information without reading everything

(scanning)

Looking only for the general or main ideas (skimming) Read a text thoroughly to understand and remember what one have read (deep

reading)

Involves analysis, interpretation, and evaluation. (Critical reading)

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.4: Demonstrate ability to understand the inferences made in a range of medium length texts

Developing inferences

while and after reading

Justifying inferences

o Practical exercises o Debating texts read o Presentations on texts

read o Group discussions

o Projector o Computer o Flipcharts o Markers o Lesson plans o Reference books o Written speeches o Newspaper reports o Reading materials o Reference books

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper application of reading techniques while reading different texts

92 | P a g e





Written evidence

Performance

Reading practice

Presentations Task: Read the text given by the teacher and identify what the

writer implies. How did you come up with such inferences?

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Proper development of inferences while reading

Inferences are well developed

Indicator: Accurate justification of inferences

Inferences are justified

Observation

References:

Beale, A. M. (2013). Skimming And Scanning: Two Important Strategies For Speeding Up Your Reading. Retrieved from Howtolearn.com website: http://www.howtolearn.com/2013/02/skimming-and-scanning-two-important-strategies-for-speeding-up-your-reading/

Brownell, J. (1996). Listening: Attitudes, principles, and skills. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.

Clay, M. M. (1994). Reading Recovery: A Guidebook for Teachers in Training. New Zealand: Heinemann Education.

Cranney, A. G., & McKell, W. E. (1983). Preparing Industrial Education Teachers as Reading Specialists [Microform] (p. 16). p. 16. Arlington, Va: ERIC Document Reproduction Service.

Day, R. R., Bamford, J., Renandya, W. A., Jacobs, G. M., & Yu, V. W.-S. (1998). Extensive Reading in the Second Language Classroom. RELC Journal, 22(2), 187–191. https://doi.org/https://doi.org/10.1177/003368829802900211

Miller, C. (1994). The empowered communicator: Keys to unlocking an audience. Nashville: Broadman&

Holman Publishers

Pease, A., & Pease, B. (2006). The definitive book of body language. New York: Bantam Books.


Demonstrate ability to understand the inferences made in a range of medium

length texts

93 | P a g e

Solt, R. (1989). Negative Fiat: Resolving the Ambiguities of “Should.” Argumentation and Advocacy, 25(3), 121–139. https://doi.org/10.1080/00028533.1989.11951390

Wheeler, L. K. (2004). Critical Reading of An Essay’s Argument. Retrieved October 12, 2004, from http://web.cn.edu/kwheeler/reading_basic.html

Wilbanks, C., & Church, R. T. (1986). Values and Policies in Controversy: An Introduction to Argumentation and Debate. Scotdale, Arizona: Gorsuch Scarisbrick.

94 | P a g e

Competence

C C M H E 4 0 1 - IMPLEMENTING S.H.E. POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

CCMHE402 Implement S.H.E. policies and procedures


Credits: 3 30

Sector: All

Sub-sector: All


Purpose statement

This module describes the outcomes required to implement Safety, Health and Environmental

(SHE) policies and procedures on a site adhering to defined policies and procedures to ensure

own safety and that of others; together with protection of the environment. This includes

implementation of recognized environmental care principles.

95 | P a g e


Not applicable







1. Identify hazardous areas to be

improved

1.1 Proper physical inspection of the working area

1.2 Proper selection of the tools and materials

1.3 Proper marking and reporting of hazardous area

1.4 Proper reporting on the area of weakness according to

company procedures

2. Apply SHE practices 2.1 Proper identification of applicable Occupational Health, Safety and Environmental (OHSE) requirements

2.2 Appropriate instruction to workers to follow safety best practices and enforce health and safety regulations

2.3 Proper establishment and maintenance of

communication with others in line with SHE

requirements

2.4 Proper performance of tasks in a safe manner and in

line with SHE best practices

3. Assess and control risks 3.1 Proper analysis of work practices and processes to

identify areas for improvement in relation to SHE issues

and hazards

3.2 Proper detection and assessment of risk, and detailed report and investigation of all incidents/ accidents

3.3 Proper control of hazard to make them less dangerous

by looking at the most effective options

4. Promote awareness of SHE in working place

4.1 Proper implementation of environmental procedures

4.2 Adequate training of workers to operate tools and

equipment

4.3 Proper inspection of the working area and appropriate remedial action to be taken to minimize or eliminate hazards

96 | P a g e

Learning unit

L U 1 : Identify hazardous areas to be improved.

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Select tools and materials 2. Inspect and identify physical feature of dangerous area 3. Mark and report on the hazardous areas

5 Hours

Learning Outcome 1.1: Select tools and materials

Types of tools, materials and equipment used to identify hazards: Dust sampler Noise meter Hammer Brushes Crowbar Ladder Rock drill Tape measure Infrared thermometer

Types of tools, materials and equipment used to control hazards:

Hammer Brushes Crowbar Ladder Timber Nails Cement Wire mesh Marking paints Tape measure

o Presentation on types of

equipment

o Group discussion

o Practical exercises on types of

equipment

o Setting visual aids

o Preparing video and audio

materials with types of

equipment

- Reference Books - internet - TV screen - Module manuals - Visual aid - Steel bar - Dust sampler - Mining anemometer - Noise meter - Hammer - Brushes - Crowbar - Ladder - Timber - Nails - Cement - Wire mesh - Marking paints - Tape measure - Infrared

thermometer - Strings and ropes - PPEs

Content Learning activities Resources

97 | P a g e

Level meter Pick Shovel Saw PPEs:

nose masks hearing

Protection goggles helmets overalls protective

footwear gloves

Formative Assessment1.1




Written evidence

Oral evidence


Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation) Task: Selecting tools and materials for hazardous area

identification

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1 :Tools, materials and equipment used to identify hazards are selected accordingly

Dust sampler

Noise meter

Hammer

Brushes

Crowbar


Proper selection of the tools and materials

98 | P a g e

Ladder

Rock drill

Tape measure

Infrared thermometer

Indicator2 :Tools, materials and equipment used to control hazards are selected accordingly

Hammer

Brushes

Crowbar

Ladder

Timber

Nails

Cement

Wire mesh

Marking paints

Tape measure

Level meter

Pick

Shovel

Saw

PPEs

Etc

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.2: Inspect and identify physical features of dangerous area

Tools and equipment for

inspection Adequate supply of tools

and equipment for inspection

Appropriate PPE for inspection according to each job specification.

Work place examination for unsafe area

Environment condition

Water

o Presentation on checklists and work place examinations

o Observation of the working place

o Group discussion about qualities of a good working place

o Practical exercises of inspecting o On checklists and work place

examinations o Preparation of visual Aid

materials o Preparation of Video and audio

aids

- Reference books - Visual aids - Computer - internet - Module manuals - Steel bar - Dust sampler - Hammer - TV Screen


99 | P a g e

Cracks Air Dust





Written

Performance

Oral

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Ticking Sentence completion Expose (presentation) Task: Inspecting of the working place

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1 : Tools and equipment for inspection are identified and supplied appropriately

Tools and equipment for inspection are identified according to each job specification

PPEs for inspection are supplied according to each job specification

Indicator2 : Environment conditions are examined accordingly

Water

Cracks

Air

Dust

Observation


Proper physical inspection of the working area

100 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.3: Mark and report on the hazardous areas

Introduction to tools

and equipment for

marking hazardous

area:

Hammer Brushes Crowbar Ladder Timber Nails Barricade tap

(Warning sign) Cones

Use of tools and

equipment for

marking hazardous

area

Reporting: Through the

administrative hierarchy

Emergency reporting

o Presentation on tools and equipment and reporting

o Group discussion on tools and equipment and reporting

o Practical exercises on marking and temporary supporting

o Preparation of visual Aid materials

o Preparation of video and audio materials

- Reference books - Visual aids - Computer - internet - Module manuals - Hammer - Brushes - Crowbar - Ladder - Timber - Nails - Barricade tap





Written

Performance

Oral

Multiple choice

True or false question

Matching

Ticking Sentence completion Expose (presentation)



Proper marking of hazardous area and proper reporting on the area of

weakness according to company procedure

101 | P a g e

Task: marking hazardous areas and reporting

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1 : Tools and equipment for marking hazardous area are introduced and used

Hammer

Brushes

Crowbar

Ladder

Timber

Nails

Barricade tap (Warning sign)

Cones

Indicator2 : Use of tools and equipment for marking hazardous area

Indicator3: Hazardous areas are reported according to the situation

Through the administrative hierarchy

Through Emergency reporting

Observation

102 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 2 : Apply SHE practices.

2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Identify and follow applicable Occupational, Health, Safety and environmental (OHSE) requirements

2. Instruct workers to follow safety best practices and enforce health and safety regulations.

3. Establish and maintain communication with others in line with SHE requirements

4. Perform tasks in a safe manner and in line with SHE best practices

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 2.1: Identify and follow applicable Occupational, Health, Safety and environmental (OHSE) requirements

Occupational and

organizational requirements:

Organizational policies

and procedures about

Manual handling

- Shifting,

- Lifting and

- Carrying

Machine guarding Organizational and

site guidelines Own role and

responsibility Quality assurance

and continuous improvement processes and standards

Emergency and evacuation procedures

Ethical values Recording and

reporting

o Research on OHSE, legislative and

Organizational requirements.

o Brainstorming on OHSE, legislative

requirements and Organizational

requirements.

o Group discussion on OHSE,

Legislative and organizational

requirements

- PPEs - Reference books - Work sheet - Markers - Flip charts - Template of OHSE

requirements


103 | P a g e

Equipment use, maintenance and storage

Healthy and Safety

requirements:

Personal protective

equipment and clothing

First Aid and Firefighting

equipment

Hazard and risk control

equipment

Psychological conditions

control mechanisms

Environmental

requirements:

Safe forest practices

Waste management: Disposal, Recycling and Re-use guidelines





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation) Task: identification of applicable Occupational Health, Safety

and Environmental (OHSE) requirements


Proper identification and application of Occupational Health, Safety and

Environmental (OHSE) requirements

104 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1. : Occupational requirements are properly identified and followed

Organizational policies and procedures about

Manual handling

Machine guarding

Organizational and site guidelines

Own role and responsibility

Quality assurance and continuous improvement processes and standards

Emergency and evacuation procedures

Ethical values

Recording and reporting

Equipment use, maintenance and storage

Indicator2: Health and safety requirements are properly identified and followed

Personal protective equipment and clothing

First Aid and Firefighting equipment

Hazard and risk control equipment

Psychological conditions control mechanisms

Indicator3 : Environment requirement are properly identified and followed

Safe forest practices

Waste management guidelines

Disposal,

Recycling and

Re-use guidelines

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.2: Instruct workers to follow safety best practices and enforce health and safety regulations.

Description of SHE

standards, regulations to

be followed

Types of tools and

materials to be used:

PPEs

Inspection checklist

o Observation about the need

of appropriate SHE

standards, regulations to be

followed, and tools and

materials to be used

o Group discussion on role of

appropriate SHE standards,

regulations to be followed,

- PPEs - Reference books - Work sheet - Markers - Flip charts - Template on SHE

standards and regulations - Template of inspection

checklist


105 | P a g e

Use of safety tools,

materials and

equipment

and tools and materials to be

used


following appropriate SHE

standards, regulations, and

using appropriate tools and

materials





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation) Task: Instructing SHE standards and regulations

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1:SHE standards, regulations to be followed are described

Use of PPEs Use of inspection checklist

Indicator 2:Tools and materials to be used are identified PPEs Inspection checklist

Indicator 3: Safety tools, materials and equipment are used

Observation


Appropriate instruction to workers to follow safety best practices and to

enforce health and safety regulations.

106 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 2.3: Establish and maintain communication with others in line with SHE requirements

Applying basics of effective communinication:

Types of effective communication with others in line with SHE requirements:

Verbal and Non-Verbal Communication

Formal and Informal Communication

Downward and Upward Communication

Categories of effective communication with others in line with SHE requirements:

Effective oral communication

Effective written communication

Techniques of Effective Oral communication in line with SHE requirements: Active listening Constructive feedback Positive, confident and

cooperative language Appropriate language

and concepts to individually social and cultural differences

Appropriate questioning to clarify and confirm understanding

Effective control of tone of voice and body language

o Group discussion about

communication with others in

line with SHE requirements.

o Role play about effective communication

o Practical exercises of

communication with others in line with SHE requirements

- Public Board notices

- Communication

devices/phones

- Safety signage


107 | P a g e

etc.

Types of questions to be asked during a communication process Close-ended

questions Open-ended

questions Etc





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation) Task: Communicate with others in line with SHE

requirements

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1 : Basics of effective communinication are applied

Types of effective communication with others in line with SHE requirements

Verbal and Non-Verbal Communication

Formal and Informal Communication

Downward and Upward Communication

Categories of effective communication with others in line with SHE requirements:

Effective oral communication

Effective written communication

Indicator2 :Techniques of Effective Oral communication in line with SHE requirements are used

Active listening


Proper establishment and maintenance of communication with others in line

with SHE requirements.

108 | P a g e

Constructive feedback

Positive, confident and cooperative language

Appropriate language and concepts to individually social and cultural differences

Appropriate questioning to clarify and confirm understanding

Effective control of tone of voice and body language

Indicator3 :Types of questions to be asked during communication process are categorized

Close-ended questions

Open-ended questions

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.4: Perform tasks in a safe manner and in line with SHE best practices

Environmental policy

content :

Compliance, improvement (where

required to reflect) and

prevention Continuous cycle of

planning, implementing, monitoring, reviewing

and improving

practices and systems

o Group discussion on content of the environment policy

o Practical exercises on applying environment policy

- Registration documents

- Regulations

- Safety standards






Proper performance of tasks in a safe manner and in line with SHE best

practices

109 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation) Task: Perform tasks in a safe manner and in line with SHE best

practices ( according to their specific trade)

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1 : Environmental policy content is applied

Compliance Improvement (where required to reflect) Prevention

Continuous cycle of

planning, implementing, monitoring, reviewing and improving practices and systems

Observation

110 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 3: Assess and control risks.

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Analyze work practices and identify areas for improvement in relation to SHE issues and hazards

2. Detect, assess and report SHE issues and Hazards in the work area to appropriate personnel

3. Control hazard to make them less dangerous by looking at the most effective options.

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1: Analyse work practices and identify areas for improvement in relation to SHE issues and hazards

Applying Continuous Process Improvement

(CPI) concepts and tools: CPI “Musts” and

Principles:

Stop fixing and start improving

The best practices are the ones you already have

Changing behavior is more important than changing processes

If you aren’t failing, you aren’t trying

CPI Methods Lean Six Sigma Theory of Constraints Business Process

Reengineering

o Small group discussion about Continuous Process Improvement (CPI) concepts and tools

o Individual work about CPI Methods

o Role play about application of CPI musts and principles

o Simulation about roles and responsibilities of CPI

- Role play scenario - Reference books - Online materials - Scholarly materials - Video record


https://daniellock.com/4-principles-of-continuous-improvement/#one

https://daniellock.com/4-principles-of-continuous-improvement/#one

https://daniellock.com/4-principles-of-continuous-improvement/#two



https://daniellock.com/4-principles-of-continuous-improvement/#three



https://daniellock.com/4-principles-of-continuous-improvement/#four

https://daniellock.com/4-principles-of-continuous-improvement/#four

111 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation) Task: make analysis of work practices and processes to identify

areas for improvement in relation to SHE issues and hazards

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Continuous Process Improvement (CPI) concepts and tools are applied

CPI “Musts” and Principles

CPI Methods

Observation


Proper analysis of work practices and processes to identify areas for

improvement in relation to SHE issues and hazards

112 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.2: Detect, assess and report SHE issues and Hazards in the work area to appropriate personnel

Steps of Risk assessment tool Identify and Describe

Risk Identify Triggers Estimate risk impact Estimate risk Likelihood Risk Matrix – Risk

Exposure Threshold Develop Risk Mitigation

Option

Principles for Effective Verbal Intervention

Remain calm. Isolate the individual. Watch your body

language. Keep it simple. Use reflective

questioning. Use silence. Watch you’re preverbal.

Elements of good quality risk statement

Event or condition,

Consequences on

program objectives, and

Cause

o Group work on observing possible risks

o Presentation about risks assessment findings

o Brainstorming on risks awareness

o Role play about effective verbal intervention

- Role play scenario - Reference books - Online materials - Scholarly materials






Proper detection and assessment of risk, and detailed report and

investigation of all incidents/ accidents.

113 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation) Task: Detecting and assessing risks, and detailed report and

investigating all

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Steps of Risk assessment tool are enumerated

Identify and Describe Risk Identify Triggers Estimate risk impact Estimate risk Likelihood Risk Matrix – Risk Exposure Threshold Develop Risk Mitigation Option

Indicator2: Principles for Effective Verbal Intervention are expressed Remain calm.

Isolate the individual.

Watch your body language.

Keep it simple.

Use reflective questioning.

Use silence. Watch your preverbal

Indicator3: Elements of good quality risk statement are elaborated Event or condition,

Consequences on program objectives, and

Cause

Observation

114 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.3: Control hazard to make them less dangerous by looking at the most effective options.

Methods of Hazard control prevention handle isolation remove or use of PPE

Practical Problem Solving Model (PPSM):

Clarify & Validate the Problem Break Down the Problem/Identify

Performance Gaps Set Improvement Targets Determine Root Causes Develop Countermeasures See Countermeasures Through Confirm Results & Process Standardize Successful Processes

o Group discussion about control of hazards

o Practical exercises on Practical Problem Solving Model (PPSM)

o Brainstorming on control of hazards

Procedural manuals

Environmental policy

Reference books

Checklist

Papers

Pens

Internet





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation) Task: what effective options can you come up with so as to

make hazard less dangerous?



Proper control of hazard to make them less dangerous by looking at the most

effective options.

115 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Methods of Hazard control are classified

prevention

handle

isolation

remove or use of PPE

Indicator2: Practical Problem Solving Model (PPSM) is identified

Clarify & Validate the Problem

Break Down the Problem/Identify Performance Gaps

Set Improvement Targets

Determine Root Causes

Develop Countermeasures

See Countermeasures Through

Confirm Results & Process

Standardize Successful Processes

Observation

116 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 4: Awareness of SHE in working place.

4

Learning Outcomes:

1. Implement environmental procedures 2. Provide training to workers on SHE and operational control 3. Inspect the working area and remedial action to be taken to minimize

or eliminate hazards.

5 Hours

Learning Outcome 4.1: Implement environmental procedures

Definition of environmentally sustainable work practices

Environmental Sustainability Strategies Recycling Strategy Waste Reduction

Paper Reduction Photocopiers,

Printers, Faxes & Office Equipment

Travel & Meetings Energy Efficiency &

Conservation Lights Computers and

monitors Air Conditioning

Workers & Business Partner Awareness

o Brainstorming on

Environmental goals

o Research on Environmental

goals

o Group discussion

Environmental Sustainability

Strategies

- Procedural manuals - Organizational policies

and procedures - Environmental policy


117 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose (presentation)

Task: Implementing environmental procedures

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Environmentally sustainable work practices are defined

Indicator2: Environmental Sustainability Strategies are expressed

Recycling Strategy

Waste Reduction

Paper Reduction

Photocopiers, Printers, Faxes & Office Equipment

Travel & Meetings

Energy Efficiency & Conservation

Lights

Computers and monitors

Air Conditioning

Workers & Business Partner Awareness

Observation


Proper implementation of environmental procedures

118 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 4.2: Provide training to workers on SHE and operational control

Design of OH&S package for training:

Program awareness Specific roles in the safety and

health program Hazard identification and

controls skills

Use of best methods in crosscutting issues training On the job training Off the job training Apprenticeship Training Vestibule or Training

Center Training Training Via Internship

Brainstorming on types of trainings

o Group discussion of best

methods of training

o Preparation SHE

package to deliver

- Fire extinguisher - First aid kit - Fire triangle - Personal protective

equipment and clothing

- Safety equipment - First aid equipment - Procedural manuals - Organizational

policies and procedures

- Environmental policy





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation) Task: Training on operating tools and equipment In line with

SHE requirements



Adequate training of workers to operate tools and equipments

119 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Design of OH&S package for training is drawn

Program awareness Specific roles in the safety and health program Hazard identification and controls skills

Indicator2: Best methods in crosscutting issues training are used On the job training Off the job training Apprenticeship Training Vestibule or Training Center Training Training Via Internship

Observation

120 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 4.3: Inspect the working area and remedial action to be taken to minimize or eliminate hazards.

Environmental Impacts awareness: Soil degradation Erosion Leaching Climate change Air, soil, water pollution Land sliding

Remedial actions: Workplace waste management

systems Emissions control of greenhouse

gases Use of non-renewable resources

control Chemical use control Supply chain management

o Research on environmental

impact

o Group discussion on work

sustainability

o Brainstorming on measures

for sustainability

- Environmental policy

- Procedural manuals

- Organizational policies and procedures





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose (presentation) Task: Training on operating tools and equipment In line with

SHE requirements



Proactive inspection of the working area and appropriate remedial action

to be taken to minimize or eliminate hazards.

121 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Environmental Impacts awareness are described

Soil degradation Erosion Leaching Climate change Air, soil, water pollution Land sliding

Indicator2: Remedial actions are elaborated Workplace waste management systems Emissions control of greenhouse gases Use of non-renewable resources control Chemical use control Supply chain management

Observation

References:

1. International Organization for Standardization (ISO), ISO 31000:2009, Risk management—Principles and guidelines, Switzerland, 2009

2. The Green Workplace: Sustainable Strategies that Leigh Benefit Employees, the Environment and

the Bottom Line, Stringer 2009. New York

3. Occupational Risk Control : Predicting and Preventing the Unwanted by Viner, Derek , ISBN: 9781472419712, Publication Date: 2015

4. OSHA General Industry regulations Book, 29 CFR 1910 Paperback- July1,2014 y MANCOMM Inc. (Author, Editor)

5. OH&S : a management guide by Richard Archer, Kerry Northwick, Susanne Tepe. Publication Date: 2009

6. Safety Management a Comprehensive Approach To developing A Sustainable System, Chitram Lutchman, 2012, Taylor & Francis Group,NY

7. Environmental Sustainability in the Work Place. (2018, Feb 04). Retrieved from

https://paperap.com/paper-on-environmental-sustainability-in-the-work-place/

http://www.ecu.eblib.com/patron/FullRecord.aspx?p=2004776

https://ecu.on.worldcat.org/oclc/271786642?databaseList=638

https://paperap.com/paper-on-environmental-sustainability-in-the-work-place/

122 | P a g e

Competence

INDIA4 01 - I NDUSTRIAL ATTACHMENT PROGRAM (IAP)

CCMIA 4O2 Integrate at the workplace


Credits: 3 0 3 0 0

Sector: All

Sub - sector: All


Purpose statement

This module describes the skills, knowledge and attitudes required to integrate the

learners/internee in workplace for an industrial attachment program. The module will allow

the learner to investigate and secure industrial attachment place, deal with workplace

challenges, comprehend the whole process of the industrial attachment program and be able

to demonstrate the c competencies acquired at school in the real workplace .

.

123 | P a g e


All the modules covered at RTQF level 4.



Performance criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement of

the learning unit.



1. Investigate and secure industrial attachment place

1.1 Accurate description of types of industries

1.2 Appropriate mapping of the industry organizational

structure

1.3 Proper identification of importance of industrial

attachment

1.4 Accurate collection of information on different

industries where one can carry his/her IAP

1.5 Proper selection of industrial attachment place based on

training package

1.6 Appropriate application of correspondences

2. Deal with workplace challenges 2.1 Proper identification of industrial attachment challenges

2.2 Careful development of ways/ strategies to overcome

industrial attachment challenges

2.3 Regular creativity and innovation in accordance with work situation

3. Get briefed on industrial attachment program

3.1 Proper setting of industrial attachment goals.

3.2 Proper description of IAP documents

3.3 Clear explanation on how IAP assessment is conducted.

4. Develop one’s competencies on the workplace

4.1 Expected competencies are fully developed

4.2 Trainee logbook is completely and well filled

4.3 Proper description of gained work experience

124 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.1: Describe types/categories of industry.

Content

Learning activities

Resources

• Definition of terms

Firm

Sector

Industry

Company

Organization

Factory

Enterprise

• Industry classification

Genetic industry

Extractive industry

Manufacturing industry

Construction industry

Service industry

Industry sectors

Primary

Secondary

Tertiary

Quaternary

o Group work o Group discussion o Observation of pictures o Presentation of videos o Group discussions o Group work on the industry classification. o Site visit presentation

- Pictures and videos of

various industries

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Power Point presentation

on categories of industry

- Pen

- Chalk

- IAP Manual


Learning unit

LU 1: Investigate and secure industrial attachment place .

1

10 Hours

125 | P a g e

Assessor may collect among the following evidences and make judgements on whether the performance



Written evidence Oral evidence

Essay (extended responses) Sentence completion Expose /presentation

Task: Classification of industries

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: proper definition of the terms used in industries

Firm

Sector

Industry

Company

Organization

Factory

Indicator 2: Industries classification are identified

Primary industry

Genetic industry

Extractive industry



Service industry

Industry sectors

Indicator 3: Industry sectors

Primary

Secondary

Tertiary


Accurate description of types of industries.

126 | P a g e

Quaternary

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.2: Map the industry organizational structure

Content

Learning activities

Resources

• Purpose of

organizational structure

Benefits to use

organizational chart

• Types of organizational

structure.

Line organization

Line and staff organization

Functional organization

Project organization

Matrix organization

• Organigram of industry

structure

o group discussion o Individual work o Pair work o group work o Learning through

pictures. o mapping the industry


- Sample of organizational

structure

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector


on mapping the industry


- Pictures






Expose /presentation Multiple choice Task: Concept / mind map (organizational chart)

Checklist Score


Appropriate mapping of the industry organizational structure.

127 | P a g e

Yes No

Indicator 1: Purpose of organization structure is identified

Benefits to use organizational chart

Types of organizational structure

Indicator 2: Types of organizational structure.

Line organization




Matrix organization

Observation

128 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.3:Identify importance of industrial attachment

Content

Learning activities

Resources

Benefits of IAP

Identify the challenges

faced by workers

Being more informed

about project research

Exposing the student to

demand and challenges of

the work place.

Gaining of practical

experience.

Helping the student

acquire self-reliance skills

Characteristics of IAP

to adapt.

Professional Communication

Skills.

Critical Thinking.

Parties of industrial attachment

Industry

Attaches

Training institution

o Group work o Group discussion o Asking questions o Group work on the

IAP characteristics. o Jig sow method o Research on IAP. o Group presentation

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Computer

- Internet





Proper identification of importance of industrial attachment

129 | P a g e



Multiple choice True or false question

Matching Sentence completion Expose /presentation

Task : Importance of industrial attachment

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Benefits of AIP are described

Identify the challenges faced by workers

Being more informed about project research

Exposing the student to demand and challenges of the work place.

Gaining of practical experience.

Helping the student acquire self-reliance skills.

Indicator 2: Characteristics of AIP are identified

To adapt.

Professional Communication Skills.

Critical Thinking.

Indicator 3: Parties of industrial attachment are listed

Industry

Attaches


Observation

130 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.4:Collect information on different industries

Content

Learning activities

Resources

• Industry location

factors influencing

industry location

Geographical

Non geographical

factor

• Industry type

Primary

Secondary

Tertiary

• Industry size

Mean of industrial

size

Industrial size

determination

o Observation of the environment

o Research on the industry types

and size

o Guided learning on how to collect

information

o Learning through maps

o Asking questions

o Group work on the given topic

o Industry visit

o Power Point presentation on

collection of information on different

industries

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Internet

- computer





Written Oral evidence

Essay (short responses / extended responses) Expose (presentation) Task: collection of information on different industries


Accurate collection of information on different industries where one can

carry his/her IAP.

131 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Industry location is well identified

Factors influencing industry location are identified

Indicator 2: Industry type are properly identified

Primary industry is well explained

Secondary is well explained

Tertiary is well explained

Indicator 3: Industry size

Mean of industrial size are well explained

Industrial size determination are identified

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.5:Apply correspondences

Content

Learning activities

Resources

IAP selection criteria Training package Task related to the field Working hours

Use of workplace documents.

IAP application letter

Curriculum vitae

E-mail

Complain letter

Thanks letter

Ways of keeping safe storage

Binding Filing Electronic

data storage Method of document

arrangement Chronological Subject

o Research on how to

use workplace

documents

o Guided learning on

how to write

workplace documents

o Asking questions

o Group work on the

interpretation of

the workplace

documents

o Reflection on

training package

o Pair sharing of

selection criteria of

IAP Place

o Discussion

o Asking question

o Industry visit

- Sample of IAP

application letter

- Sample of

Curriculum vitae

- Sample of Complain

letter

- Sample of thanks

letter

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Correspondences

132 | P a g e

Alphabetic Numerical





Written evidence

Product evidence

Short responses

Different Workplace documents Task: Appropriate application of correspondences.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Essential element of workplace documents:

Being up to date

well explained

Be clear

Indicator2: Use of workplace documents.


Curriculum vitae

E-mail

Complain letter

Thanks letter

Indicator3: Ways of keeping safe storage

Binding

Filing

Electronic data storage


Appropriate application of correspondences.

133 | P a g e

Indicator4: Method of document arrangement

Chronological

Subject

Alphabetic

Numerical



Curriculum vitae

Observation

134 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 2.1:Identify industrial attachment challenges

Content

Learning activities

Resources

Definition of IAP challenge

Types of IAP challenges (before, During and after)

Budget issues

Cope with a new work

situation

Insufficient of industrial

attachment place

Lack of assistance from

industrial attachment in charge

Industry attitude toward

interns

Strategic plan to overcome IAP

challenges

o Observation of the

environment

o Group discussion on IAP

challenges

o Pair sharing of IAP challenges.

- Reference books

- Projector


on creativity and

innovation


Learning unit

LU 2: Deal with workplace challenges .

2

Learning Outcome s :

1. Identify industrial attachment challenges 2. Develop ways/strategies to overcome industrial attachment

challenges 3. Discuss creativity and innovation at work place

2 0 Hours

135 | P a g e




• Written evidence

• Oral evidence

Multiple choice exercises

True or false questioning

Matching

Sentence completion

Expose (presentation).

Task: identification of industrial attachment challenges.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Possible IAP challenges (before, during and after) are identified

Budget issues

Cope with a new work situation

Insufficient of industrial attachment place

Lack of assistance from industrial attachment in charge

Industry attitude toward interns

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.2: Develop ways/strategies to overcome industrial attachment challenges

Content

Learning activities

Resources


Proper identification of industrial attachment challenges.

136 | P a g e

• Effective strategies to enhance IAP

Partnership with industries

Collaboration/Regular contact

Early Preparation of IAP

• Tips for Overcoming Your IAP

Challenges

Being patient

Meet new people

Effective communication

o Pair sharing on effective

strategies to enhance IAP

o Brainstorming on the way to

overcome IAP challenges. o

Research on effective strategies

and tips to overcome IAP

challenges

o Asking questions

o Group discussion on ways to

overcome IAP challenges

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Power Point

presentation on

creativity and

innovation





Written evidence Performance

Essay (short responses /extended responses) Role play

Scenarios Scenarios – Completed checklist.

Task: development of strategies to overcome industrial

attachment challenges.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Effective strategies to enhance IAP are identified



Careful development of ways/ strategies to overcome industrial


137 | P a g e



Indicator 2: Strategies to overcome IAP challenges are identified

Being patient

Meet new people


Observation

Learning Outcome 2.3:Discuss creativity and innovation at work place

Content

Learning activities

Resources

• Definition of creativity and

innovation

• Ways to develop creativity in the

workplace.

• Ways to promote innovation in

your workplace.

Be Efficient. Have the Right Tools and

Equipment

Improve workplace

conditions.

Practice Positive

Reinforcement.

Share ideas with colleagues

o Pair sharing of effective ways

to promote creativity and

innovation

o Research on good ways to

develop creativity and

innovation

o Asking questions

o Discussions on ways to

promote and develop

creativity and innovation

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Power Point

presentation on

creativity and

innovation)


138 | P a g e




Written evidence Multiple choice

True or false question Essay (short responses /extended responses)

Task: creativity and innovation in accordance with work situation.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: List of possible ways to develop creativity and innovation on the workplace

Be Efficient.

Have the Right Tools and Equipment

Improve workplace conditions.

Practice Positive Reinforcement.

Share ideas with colleague

Indictor2: Ways to promote innovation in your workplace

Observation


Regular creativity and innovation in accordance with work situation.

139 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 2: Get briefed on industrial attachment program

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Set industrial attachment goals. 2. Describe of IAP documents. 3. Explain how IAP assessment is conducted.

5Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1: Set industrial attachment goals.

Content

Learning activities

Resources

Goals of industrial attachment

To understand real life

situations.

To develop skills in the

application of theory to

practical work situations.

To develop skills and

techniques in the careers.

To increase sense of

responsibility.

To have higher levels of

academic performance.

To enhance the ability to

improve students’

creativity skills and

sharing ideas.

o Group discussion on the IAP

goal

o Research on the IAP goals

o Asking questions

o Individual work on the

setting of own IAP goals

o Gig sow method

o Think pair share square

method

- Hand out on industrial attachment goals.

- Projector - Internet - Pen - Computer - Blackboard - chalk

140 | P a g e

To build a good communication skill

Types of goals Short term Long term Medium

Setting the Right Goals

Mastering Technical Skills

Perfecting

Interpersonal Skills

Building a Network of

Contacts






Essay (short responses /extended responses) Multiple choice

True or false question Question and answer

Task: proper setting of industrial attachment goals


Proper setting of industrial attachment goals.

141 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indictor1: industrial attachment goals are set

To experience and understand real life situations.

To develop skills in the application of theory to practical work situations.

To develop skills and techniques in the careers.

To increase sense of responsibility and good work habits.

To have higher levels of academic performance.

To enhance the ability to improve students’ creativity skills and sharing ideas.


Indictor2: Setting the Right Goals


Perfecting Interpersonal Skills

Building a Network of Contacts

Observation

142 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.2: Describe of IAP documents.

Content

Learning activities

Resources

IAP attendance IAP Logbooks:

IAP list of competencies to be

developed

sheet

IAP agreement

IAP report form

IAP Evaluation form

IAP interview form

Deferent document used in IAP

Work diary

Request of information

Request for materials

Tips to fill in logbook

Use of rough book

Keep summary list

Be consistent

o Presentation

O Group work on the

interpretation of IAP logbooks

o Exercise on the completion of

IAP logbooks

o Guided learning on how to

complete IAP logbooks

- Logbooks - Pen - Flip chart - Computer - Internet -








Sentence completion

Observation checklist

Task: assess risk associated to the business in line with the business

Plan developed.



plan developed

143 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: IAP documents are described

IAP list of competencies to be developed

IAP attendance sheet

IAP agreement

IAP report form

IAP Evaluation form

Indicator 2: Deferent document used in IAP

Work diary



Indicator 3: Tips to fill in logbook

Use of rough book

Keep summary list

Be consistent

IAP interview form

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.3: Explain how IAP assessment is conducted.

Content

Learning activities

Resources

• Written tests

• Performance evidence (marked by company supervisor)

• Respond to interview questions

o Presentation by trainees and trainer

o Discussion on IAP

assessment is conducted

o Asking questions

- Vocational tools

- Task sheets

144 | P a g e






Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning

Sentence completion Observation checklist A produced schedule

Task: steps for conducting IAP assessment

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: IAP assessment is conducted through

Written evidence

oral questions

A produced schedule

Observation


Briefly explain steps for conducting IAP assessment

145 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 4.1: Develop competencies related to one’s field.

Content

Learning activities

Resources

Competencies

Various activities/task related to one’s field

o Preform daily workplace routine tasks related to one’s field.

- Industry tools, equipment and consumables related to one’s field





Expected competencies are fully developed.

Learning unit

LU 4: Develop one’s c ompetencies on the workplace .

4

Learning Outcome s :

1. Develop competencies related to one’s field. 2. Fill in trainee logbook 3. Describe gained work experience

2 70 Hours

146 | P a g e


Performance Product

Essay& Cases study True or false questioning


A produced schedule

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Various activities/task related to one’s field

List of well performed activities

tasks given by industry

Observation

147 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 4.2: Fill in trainee logbook

Content

Learning activities

Resources

Trainee logbooks:


developed

sheet

IAP report

IAP evaluation

IAP interview

o Complete trainee logbook o Complete IAP reports o Complete IAP Evaluation o Conduct IAP interview

- logbooks





Performance Product

Expose (presentation) reports

workplace documents


Trainee logbook is completely and well filled.

148 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: trainee logbooks are mentioned


sheet

IAP agreement

IAP report form

IAP Evaluation form

AP interview form

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.3: Describe gained work experience

Content

Learning activities

Resources

Work experiences related to one’s field

o Presentation on work experience related to one’s field

- Questionnaires related to work experience.





Proper description of gained work experience.

149 | P a g e


Written evidence Oral


Essay (short responses / extended responses)photos

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Gained work experience during the industrial attachment period

Specialist skills

advice from colleagues

put together a portfolio of work

general skills

self-reliance skills

Brief presentation of experience gained during the industrial attachment period

Observation

150 | P a g e

References:

1. http://www.differencebetween.net/business/difference-between-factory-and-industry/

2. https://www.capitalfm.co.ke/campus/students-5-things-you-need-to-do-to-secure-

anattachment/

3. http://smallbusiness.chron.com/purpose-organizational-structure-3812.html

4. http://iamanentrepreneur.in/guru-gyan/importance-mapping-organisation-structure/

5. https://www.edrawsoft.com/why-use-orgchart.php

6. http://open.lib.umn.edu/strategicmanagement/chapter/9-3-creating-an-

organizationalstructure/

7. http://www.differencebetween.com/difference-between-company-and-vs-industry/

8. https://hbr.org/2014/11/to-encourage-innovation-make-it-a-competition

9. http://www.innovationmanagement.se/2012/11/09/does-encouraging-creativity-in-

theworkplace-improve-innovation/

10. http://smallbusiness.chron.com/different-ways-file-documents-filing-cabinet-57513.html

11. https://www.thebalance.com/creating-a-document-management-system-2948084

12. http://www.wow.com/wiki/Technical_writing?s_chn=70&s_pt=source2&s_gl=US&v_t=content

13. https://bizfluent.com/how-5093085-write-daily-report.html

14. https://resources.workable.com/supervisor-job-description

15. https://ischool.syr.edu/infospace/2017/07/20/tips-overcoming-Industrial Attachment Program

(IAP)-challenges/

16. https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Frank_Twenefour/publication/272370787_Industrial_Tr

a

ining_Programmes_of_Polytechnics_in_Ghana_The_Pertinent_Issues/links/55056a6e0cf24cee

3 a046df8/Industrial-Training-Programmes-of-Polytechnics-in-Ghana-The-Pertinent-Issues.pdf

17. https://toughnickel.com/misc/Challenges-faced-by-interns-Problems-commonly-found-

inIndustrial Attachment Program (IAP)s

18. AdupeprohJ.,Frank.B.KTwenefour (2015) industrial training program of polytechnics in Ghana:

the pertinent issues, Ghana

http://www.differencebetween.net/business/difference-between-factory-and-industry/










https://www.capitalfm.co.ke/campus/students-5-things-you-need-to-do-to-secure-an-attachment/






















http://smallbusiness.chron.com/purpose-organizational-structure-3812.html








http://iamanentrepreneur.in/guru-gyan/importance-mapping-organisation-structure/










https://www.edrawsoft.com/why-use-orgchart.php






http://open.lib.umn.edu/strategicmanagement/chapter/9-3-creating-an-organizational-structure/












http://www.differencebetween.com/difference-between-company-and-vs-industry/












https://hbr.org/2014/11/to-encourage-innovation-make-it-a-competition














http://www.innovationmanagement.se/2012/11/09/does-encouraging-creativity-in-the-workplace-improve-innovation/
















http://smallbusiness.chron.com/different-ways-file-documents-filing-cabinet-57513.html














https://www.thebalance.com/creating-a-document-management-system-2948084












http://www.wow.com/wiki/Technical_writing?s_chn=70&s_pt=source2&s_gl=US&v_t=content


https://bizfluent.com/how-5093085-write-daily-report.html










https://resources.workable.com/supervisor-job-description






https://ischool.syr.edu/infospace/2017/07/20/tips-overcoming-internship-challenges/










https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Frank_Twenefour/publication/272370787_Industrial_Training_Programmes_of_Polytechnics_in_Ghana_The_Pertinent_Issues/links/55056a6e0cf24cee3a046df8/Industrial-Training-Programmes-of-Polytechnics-in-Ghana-The-Pertinent-Issues.pdf
























https://toughnickel.com/misc/Challenges-faced-by-interns-Problems-commonly-found-in-internships


















151 | P a g e

Competence

N W I A 4 0 2 - NDUSTRIAL ATTACHMENT PROGRAM (IAP)

NWIA402 Integrate at the workplace


Credits: 30 300

Sector: ALL

Sub-sector: ALL


Purpose statement

This module describes the skills, knowledge and attitudes required to integrate the

learners/internee in workplace for an industrial attachment program. The module will allow the

learner to investigate and secure industrial attachment place, deal with workplace challenges,

comprehend the whole process of the industrial attachment program and be able to

demonstrate the competences acquired at school in the real workplace

152 | P a g e


All the modules covered at RTQF level 4.



Performance criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement of

the learning unit.



1. Investigate and secure industrial attachment place 1.1. Accurate description of types of industries

1.2. Appropriate mapping of the industry organizational structure

1.3. Proper identification of importance of industrial attachment

1.4. Accurate collection of information on different industries where one can carry his/her IAP

1.5. Proper selection of industrial attachment place based on training package

1.6. Appropriate application of correspondences

2. Deal with workplace challenges 2.1. Proper identification of industrial attachment challenges

2.2. Careful development of ways/ strategies to overcome

industrial attachment challenges

2.3. Regular creativity and innovation in accordance with

work situation

3. Get briefed on industrial attachment program

3.1. Proper setting of industrial attachment goals. 3.2. Proper description of IAP documents 3.3. Clear explanation on how IAP assessment is conducted.

4. Develop one’s competencies on the workplace

4.1. Expected competencies are fully developed 4.2. Trainee logbook is completely and well filled 4.3. Proper description of gained work experience

153 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 1: Investigate and secure industrial attachment place

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Describe types/categories of industry. 2. Map the industry organizational structure 3. Identify importance of industrial attachment 4. Collect information on different industries 5. Apply correspondences

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 1.1: Describe types/categories of industry.

Content

Learning activities

Resources

• Definition of terms

Firm

Sector

Industry

Company

Organization

Factory

Enterprise

• Industry classification

Genetic industry

Extractive industry



Service industry

Industry sectors

Primary

Secondary

Tertiary

Quaternary

o Group work o Group discussion o Observation of

pictures o Presentation of videos o Group discussions o Group work on the

industry classification. o o Site visit

presentation

- Pictures and videos of

various industries

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector


on categories of industry

- Pen

- Chalk

- IAP Manual

154 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Essay (extended responses) Sentence completion Expose /presentation

Task: Classification of industries

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: proper definition of the terms used in industries

Firm

Sector

Industry

Company

Organization

Factory

Indicator 2: Industries classification are identified

Primary industry

Genetic industry

Extractive industry



Service industry

Industry sectors

Indicator 3: Industry sectors

Primary


Accurate description of types of industries.

155 | P a g e

Secondary

Tertiary

Quaternary

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.2: Map the industry organizational structure

• Purpose of organizational

structure

Benefits to use

organizational chart

• Types of organizational

structure.

Line organization

Line and staff

organization



Matrix organization

Organigram of

industry structure

o group discussion o Individual work o Pair work o group work o Learning through

pictures. o mapping the industry


- Sample of organizational

structure

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Power Point

presentation on

mapping the industry


- Pictures






Appropriate mapping of the industry organizational structure.

156 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence

- Expose /presentation - Multiple choice

Task: Concept / mind map (organizational chart)

Checklist

Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Purpose of organization structure is identified

Benefits to use organizational chart

Types of organizational structure

Indicator 2: Types of organizational structure.

Line organization




Matrix organization

Observation

157 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.3:Identify importance of industrial attachment

Content

Learning activities

Resources

Benefits of IAP

Identify the challenges

faced by workers

Being more informed

about project research

Exposing the student to

demand and challenges of

the work place.

Gaining of practical

experience.

Helping the student

acquire self-reliance skills

Characteristics of IAP

to adapt.

Professional Communication

Skills.

Critical Thinking.

Parties of industrial

attachment

Industry

Attaches


o Group work o Group discussion o Asking questions o Group work on the

IAP characteristics. o Jig sow method o Research on IAP. o Group presentation

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Computer

- Internet

158 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence

- Multiple choice - True or false question

- Matching - Sentence completion - Expose /presentation

- Task : Importance of industrial attachment

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Benefits of AIP are described

Identify the challenges faced by workers

Being more informed about project research

Exposing the student to demand and challenges of the work place.

Gaining of practical experience.

Helping the student acquire self-reliance skills.

Indicator 2: Characteristics of AIP are identified

To adapt.

Professional Communication Skills.

Critical Thinking.

Indicator 3: Parties of industrial attachment are listed

Industry

Attaches


Proper identification of importance of industrial attachment

159 | P a g e


Observation

Learning Outcome 1.4:Collect information on different industries

Content

Learning activities

Resources

• Industry location

factors influencing

industry location

Geographical

Non geographical

factor

• Industry type

Primary

Secondary

Tertiary

• Industry size

Mean of industrial size

Industrial size

determination


environment

o Research on the industry

types and size

o Guided learning on how to

collect information

o Learning through maps

o Asking questions

o Group work on the given

topic

o Industry visit

o Power Point presentation

on collection of information

on different industries

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Internet

- computer



Accurate collection of information on different industries where one can

carry his/her IAP.

160 | P a g e




Written Oral evidence

Essay (short responses / extended responses) Expose (presentation) Task: collection of information on different industries

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Industry location is well identified

Factors influencing industry location are identified

Indicator 2: Industry type are properly identified

Primary industry is well explained

Secondary is well explained

Tertiary is well explained

Indicator 3: Industry size

Mean of industrial size are well explained

Industrial size determination are identified

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.1: Clean floor

IAP selection criteria Training package Task related to the field Working hours

Use of workplace documents.


Curriculum vitae

E-mail

Complain letter

o Research on how to use

workplace documents

o Guided learning on how

to write workplace

documents

o Asking questions

o Group work on the

interpretation of the

workplace documents

- Sample of IAP

application

letter

- Sample of

Curriculum vitae

- Sample of

Complain letter

- Sample of

thanks letter


161 | P a g e

Thanks letter

Ways of keeping safe storage

Binding Filing Electronic

data storage

Method of document arrangement

Chronological

Subject Alphabeti

c Numerica

l

o Reflection on training

package

o Pair sharing of selection

criteria of IAP Place

o Discussion

o Asking question

o Industry visit

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Correspondence

s





Written evidence

Product evidence

Short responses

Different Workplace documents Task: Appropriate application of correspondences.


Appropriate application of correspondences.

162 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Essential element of workplace documents:

Being up to date

well explained

Be clear



Curriculum vitae

E-mail

Complain letter

Thanks letter

Indicator3: Ways of keeping safe storage

Binding

Filing

Electronic data storage

Indicator4: Method of document arrangement

Chronological

Subject

Alphabetic

Numerical



Curriculum vitae

Observation

163 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 2: Deal with workplace challenges

2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Identify industrial attachment challenges 2. Develop ways/strategies to overcome industrial attachment

challenges 3. Discuss creativity and innovation at work place

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 2.1:Identify industrial attachment challenges

Definition of IAP challenge

Types of IAP challenges (before, During and after)

Budget issues

Cope with a new

work situation

Insufficient of

industrial

attachment place

Lack of assistance

from industrial

attachment in

charge

Industry attitude

toward interns

Strategic plan to

overcome IAP

challenges


environment

o Group discussion on IAP

challenges

o Pair sharing of IAP

challenges.

- Reference books

- Projector


on creativity and innovation


164 | P a g e





• Written evidence

• Oral evidence

Multiple choice exercises


Matching

Sentence completion

Expose (presentation).

Task: identification of industrial attachment challenges.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Possible IAP challenges (before, during and after) are identified

Budget issues

Cope with a new work situation

Insufficient of industrial attachment place

Lack of assistance from industrial attachment in charge

Industry attitude toward interns

Observation


Proper identification of industrial attachment challenges.

165 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 2.2: Develop ways/strategies to overcome industrial attachment challenges

Content

Learning activities

Resources

• Effective strategies to enhance IAP




• Tips for Overcoming Your IAP

Challenges

Being patient

Meet new people


o Pair sharing on effective

strategies to enhance IAP

o Brainstorming on the way

to overcome IAP

challenges. o Research on

effective strategies and tips

to overcome IAP challenges

o Asking questions

o Group discussion on ways

to overcome IAP challenges

- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Power Point

presentation on

creativity and

innovation





Written evidence Performance

- Essay (short responses /extended responses) Role play

- Scenarios - Scenarios – Completed checklist.

Task: development of strategies to overcome industrial


Careful development of ways/ strategies to overcome industrial


166 | P a g e


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Effective strategies to enhance IAP are identified




Indicator 2: Strategies to overcome IAP challenges are identified

Being patient

Meet new people


Observation

Learning Outcome 2.3:Discuss creativity and innovation at work place

• Definition of creativity and

innovation

• Ways to develop creativity in

the workplace.

• Ways to promote innovation

in your workplace.

Be Efficient. Have the Right Tools

and

Equipment

Improve workplace

conditions.

Practice Positive

Reinforcement.

o Pair sharing of effective

ways to promote


o Research on good ways to

develop creativity and

innovation

o Asking questions

o Discussions on ways to

promote and develop


- Reference books

- Chalkboard

- Projector

- Power Point presentation on

creativity and innovation)


167 | P a g e

Share ideas with

colleagues






True or false question Essay (short responses /extended responses)

Task: creativity and innovation in accordance with work situation.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: List of possible ways to develop creativity and innovation on the workplace

Be Efficient.

Have the Right Tools and Equipment

Improve workplace conditions.

Practice Positive Reinforcement.

Share ideas with colleague

Indictor2: Ways to promote innovation in your workplace

Observation


Regular creativity and innovation in accordance with work situation.

168 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 3: Get briefed on industrial attachment program

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Set industrial attachment goals. 2. Describe of IAP documents. 3. Explain how IAP assessment is conducted.

5Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1: Set industrial attachment goals.

Goals of industrial attachment

To understand real

life situations.

To develop skills in

the application of

theory to practical

work situations.

To develop skills and

techniques in the

careers.

To increase sense of

responsibility.

To have higher levels

of academic

performance.

To enhance the

ability to improve

students’ creativity

o Group discussion on the IAP

goal

o Research on the IAP goals

o Asking questions

o Individual work on the

setting of own IAP goals

o Gig sow method

o Think pair share square

method

- Hand out on industrial attachment goals.

- Projector - Internet - Pen - Computer - Blackboard - chalk


169 | P a g e

skills and sharing

ideas.


Types of goals Short term Long term Medium

Setting the Right Goals

Mastering Technical

Skills

Perfecting

Interpersonal

Skills

Building a Network

of Contacts





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Essay (short responses /extended responses) Multiple choice



Proper setting of industrial attachment goals.

170 | P a g e

Question and answer Task: proper setting of industrial attachment goals

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indictor1: industrial attachment goals are set

To experience and understand real life situations.

To develop skills in the application of theory to practical work situations.

To develop skills and techniques in the careers.

To increase sense of responsibility and good work habits.

To have higher levels of academic performance.

To enhance the ability to improve students’ creativity skills and sharing ideas.


Indictor2: Setting the Right Goals


Perfecting Interpersonal Skills

Building a Network of Contacts

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.2: Describe of IAP documents.

IAP attendance IAP Logbooks:

IAP list of

competencies to be

developed

sheet

IAP agreement

o Presentation

o Group work on the

interpretation of IAP

logbooks

o Exercise on the

completion of IAP

logbooks

- Logbooks - Pen - Flip chart - Computer - Internet -


171 | P a g e

IAP report form

IAP Evaluation form

IAP interview form

Deferent document

used in IAP

Work diary

Request of

information


Tips to fill in logbook

Use of rough book

Keep summary list

Be consistent

o Guided learning on how

to complete IAP logbooks





Written evidence

Oral evidence



Sentence completion

Observation checklist Task: assess risk associated to the business in line with the business Plan developed.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: IAP documents are described


IAP attendance sheet

IAP agreement

IAP report form



plan developed

172 | P a g e

IAP Evaluation form

Indicator 2: Deferent document used in IAP

Work diary



Indicator 3: Tips to fill in logbook

Use of rough book

Keep summary list

Be consistent

IAP interview form

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.3: Explain how IAP assessment is conducted.

Content

Learning activities

Resources

• Written tests

• Performance evidence (marked by company supervisor)

• Respond to interview questions

o Presentation by trainees and trainer

o Discussion on IAP

assessment is conducted

o Asking questions

- Vocational tools

- Task sheets






Briefly explain steps for conducting IAP assessment

173 | P a g e

Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice exercises Essay& Cases study True or false questioning

Sentence completion Observation checklist A produced schedule

Task: steps for conducting IAP assessment

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: IAP assessment is conducted through

Written evidence

oral questions

A produced schedule

Observation

174 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 4: Develop one’s competencies on the workplace

4

Learning Outcomes:

1. Develop competencies related to one’s field 2. Fill in trainee logbook 3. Describe gained work experience

270 Hours

Learning Outcome 4.1: Develop competencies related to one’s field.

Content

Learning activities

Resources

Competencies

Various activities/task related to one’s field

o Preform daily workplace routine tasks related to one’s field.

- Industry tools, equipment and consumables related to one’s field






Expected competencies are fully developed.

175 | P a g e

Performance Product

Essay& Cases study True or false questioning


A produced schedule

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Various activities/task related to one’s field

List of well performed activities

tasks given by industry

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.2: Fill in trainee logbook

Content

Learning activities

Resources

Trainee logbooks:


developed

sheet

IAP report

IAP evaluation

IAP interview

o Complete trainee logbook o Complete IAP reports o Complete IAP Evaluation o Conduct IAP interview

- logbooks

176 | P a g e





Performance Product

- Expose (presentation) reports

- workplace documents

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: trainee logbooks are mentioned


sheet IAP agreement

IAP report form IAP Evaluation form

AP interview form

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.3: Describe gained work experience


Trainee logbook is completely and well filled.

177 | P a g e

Content

Learning activities

Resources

Work experiences related to one’s field

o Presentation on work experience related to one’s field

- Questionnaires related to work experience.





Written evidence Oral


Essay (short responses / extended responses)photos

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Gained work experience during the industrial attachment period

Specialist skills

advice from colleagues

put together a portfolio of work

general skills

self-reliance skills

Brief presentation of experience gained during the industrial attachment period

Observation


Proper description of gained work experience.

178 | P a g e

References:

19. http://www.differencebetween.net/business/difference-between-factory-and-industry/

20. https://www.capitalfm.co.ke/campus/students-5-things-you-need-to-do-to-secure-

anattachment/

21. http://smallbusiness.chron.com/purpose-organizational-structure-3812.html

22. http://iamanentrepreneur.in/guru-gyan/importance-mapping-organisation-structure/

23. https://www.edrawsoft.com/why-use-orgchart.php

24. http://open.lib.umn.edu/strategicmanagement/chapter/9-3-creating-an-

organizationalstructure/

25. http://www.differencebetween.com/difference-between-company-and-vs-industry/

26. https://hbr.org/2014/11/to-encourage-innovation-make-it-a-competition

27. http://www.innovationmanagement.se/2012/11/09/does-encouraging-creativity-in-

theworkplace-improve-innovation/

28. http://smallbusiness.chron.com/different-ways-file-documents-filing-cabinet-57513.html

29. https://www.thebalance.com/creating-a-document-management-system-2948084

30. http://www.wow.com/wiki/Technical_writing?s_chn=70&s_pt=source2&s_gl=US&v_t=content

31. https://bizfluent.com/how-5093085-write-daily-report.html

32. https://resources.workable.com/supervisor-job-description

33. https://ischool.syr.edu/infospace/2017/07/20/tips-overcoming-Industrial Attachment Program

(IAP)-challenges/

34. https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Frank_Twenefour/publication/272370787_Industrial_Tr

a

ining_Programmes_of_Polytechnics_in_Ghana_The_Pertinent_Issues/links/55056a6e0cf24cee

3 a046df8/Industrial-Training-Programmes-of-Polytechnics-in-Ghana-The-Pertinent-Issues.pdf

35. https://toughnickel.com/misc/Challenges-faced-by-interns-Problems-commonly-found-

inIndustrial Attachment Program (IAP)s

36. AdupeprohJ.,Frank.B.KTwenefour (2015) industrial training program of polytechnics in

Ghana: the pertinent issues, Ghana















































































































































































































179 | P a g e

Competence

C C M K N 4 0 1 - IKINYARWANDA CY’UMUNYAMWUGA

CCMKN402 Gukoresha Ikinyarwanda cy’umunyamwuga

Ikiciro: 4 Amasaha ateganijwe 30

Indengo y’amasaha: 3

Ishami: Yose

Agashami: Twose

Igihe yateguriwe: Nzeri, 2021

Intego nyamukuru

Iyi mbumbanyigisho irasobanura ubumenyi n’ubushobozi bukenewe kugira ngo uwiga ashobore:

180 | P a g e

Gukoresha Ikinyarwanda cy’umwuga mu kumva, kuvuga, gusoma no kwandika, mu bikorwa bijyanye n’umwuga we;

gukoresha ubuvanganzo gakondo bufatiye ku mwuga mu gushyikirana n’abandi abagezaho ibitekerezo bye kandi agaragaza uko yakira ibyabo;

kugaragaza imyumvire n’imyifatire ikwiye agenda avoma mu myandiko inyuranye;

Kugaragaza ibyiza by’ikoranabuhanga mu iterambere ry’umwuga;

Gutandukanya inshinga iri mu mbundo, itondaguye n’inshinga nkene;

Kugaragaza amategeko y’igenamajwi mu izina mbonera

Gukoresha neza impakanyi n’indangahantu mu nteruro.

Ubushobozi fatizo

Ubushobozi mu Kinyarwanda kiboneye

Ingingo n’ibipimo by’ubushobozi

Ingingo z’ubushobozi zisobanura umusaruro w’ibanze ugomba kugerwaho.

Ibipimo by’ubushobozi bisobanura ubushobozi busabwa mu kugaragaza ko intego zikubiye mu mbumbe

zagezweho.

Ingingo z’Ubushobozi Ibipimo by’Ubushobozi

1. Gukoresha ubuvanganzo

gakondo bufatiye ku

mwuga ashyikirana

n’abandi no gukoresha

ikomorazina

n’ikomoranshinga.

1.1. Gusesenguraubuvanganzo gakondo bufatiye ku mwuga.

1.2. Gukoresha neza ikomorazina n’ikomoranshinga mu kunguka

amagambo mashya.

1.3. Gutarama Kinyarwanda akoresheje ubuvanganzo gakondo

bufatiye ku mwuga.

2. Gukoresha Ikinyarwanda

kiboneye agaragaza ibyiza

by’ikoranabuhanga mu

iterambere ry’umwuga no

gutandukanya ubwoko

bw’inshinga.

2.1. Gusoma no gusesengura neza umwandiko ku

nsanganyamatsiko y’ikoranabuhanga n’iterambere

ry’umwuga .

2.2. Gutandukanya neza inshinga mburabuzi, inshinga iri mu

mbundo n’inshinga itondaguye.

2.3. Gukoresha neza inshinga mburabuzi munteruro.


kiboneye uwiga agaragaza

ububi bw’ibiyobyabwenge

mu rubyiruko no

kugaragaza mu izina

mbonera amategeko

y’igenamajwi agendanye


nsanganyamatsiko y’ububi bw’ibiyobyabwenge mu

rubyiruko.

3.2. Kugaragaza mu izina mbonera amategeko y’igenamajwi

agendanye n’ingombajwi ziburizwamo.

3.3. Kugaragaza mu izina mbonera amategeko y’igenamajwi

agendanye n’ingombajwi zizihinduka izindi.

181 | P a g e

n’ingombajwi ziburizwamo

n’izihinduka izindi.



uburyo bunyuranye bwo

gufata neza ibidukikije

,gukoresha indangahantu

n’icyungo


nsanganyamatsiko yo gufata neza ibidukikije.

4.2. Kugaragaza neza indangahantu mu nteruro zitandukanye.

4.3. Gukoresha neza icyungo” na“ mu nteruro ziboneye uwiga

yihimbiye.



akamaro k’ubutabazi

bw’ibanze no gukoresha

impakanyi n’indango

z’inshinga

5.1. Gusoma no gusesengura neza umwandiko ku nsanganyama-

tsiko uwiga agaragaza akamaro k’ubutabazi bw’ibanze

5.2. Kugaragaza neza impakanyi mu nteruro zitandukanye.

5.3. Gukoresha neza indango z’inshinga mu nteruro.

182 | P a g e

LU 1: Gukoresha ubuvanganzo gakondo bufatiye ku mwuga ashyikirana n’abandi.

1

Umusaruro w’inyigisho:

1. Gusoma no gusesengura neza umwandiko w’ubuvanganzo

gakondo bufatiye ku mwuga.

2. Gukoresha neza ikomorazina n’ikomoranshinga mu kunguka

amagambo mashya.

3. Gutarama Kinyarwanda akoresheje ubuvanganzo gakondo bufatiye ku mwuga Amasaha 6

Umusaruro w’inyigisho 1.1: Gusoma no gusesengura neza umwandiko w’ubuvanganzo gakondo

bufatiye ku mwuga

Inshoza y’ubuvanganzo bufatiye ku mwuga.

Ingero z’ubuvanganzo bufatiye ku mwuga: Amavumvu

Amasare

Ibyidogo by’isuka

o Imyitozo yo gufata mu mutwe ubuvanganzo bufatiye ku mwuga.

o Imyitozo mu matsinda yo gusoma bakuranwa

o Gusoma bucece o Gusoma baranguruye

- Ibitabo by’ubuvanganzo bushingiye ku mwuga

- Furashi disiki - Ikibaho - Marikeri - Murandasi - Mudasobwa - Inkoranyamagambo

n’inkoranyamuga

Isuzuma Mbonezanyigisho 1.1

Usuzuma akusanya bimwe mu bihamya bikurikira, akanzura niba ubushobozi busuzumwa bwagezweho.

Ibyigwa Imbonezamasomo

Imfashanyigisho

Ubushobozi busuzumwa

Yakoresheje neza Ikinyarwanda kiboneye agaragaza ko yumva ubuvanganzo

gakondo bufatiye ku mwuga ashyikirana n’abandi.

183 | P a g e

Gihamya Isuzuma

Amajwi n’amashusho

Inyandiko

Ibibazo bifunze n’ibifunguye

Urutonde rw’ibisuzumwa Arabishoboye

Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho 1: Inshoza y’ubuvanganzo gakondo yasobanuwe neza

Ikitabwaho 2: Ingero z’ubuvanganzo bufatiye ku mwuga zatanzwe

Yashyikiranye n’abandi abinyujije mu byidogo by’isuka

Yashyikiranye n’abandi abinyujije mu nganzo y’amasare

Yashyikiranye n’abandi abinyujije mu nganzo y’amavumvu

Umwanzuro

Umusaruro w’inyigisho 1.2. : Gukoresha neza ikomorazina n’ikomoranshinga mu kunguka

amagambo mashya.

Inshoza y’ikomorazina

Inshoza

y’ikomoranshinga

Ingero z’amazina

yakomotse ku nshinga

Ingero z’inshinga

zakomotse ku mazina

o Imyitozo ku ikomorazina

n’ikomora nshinga

o Imikoro mu matsinda ku

ikomoranshinga

- Ibitaboby’ikiboneza mvugo)

- Furashi disiki - Ikibaho - Marikeri - Murandasi - Inkoranyamagambo

n’inkoranyamuga



activities

Imfashanyigisho

184 | P a g e


Gihamya Isuzuma

Inyandiko Ibibazo bifunze n’ibifunguye

Imyitozo yanditse ku ikomorazina


Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho 1: Yasobanuye neza inshoza y’ikomorazina amagambo mashya

Ikitabwaho 2: Yakoresheje neza ikomorazina n’ikomoranshinga mu kunguka

Ikitabwaho 3: Yatanze ingero zifatika z’amazina akomoka ku nshinga

Ikitabwaho 4: yatanze ingero zifatika z’inshinga zakomotse ku mazina

Umwanzuro

Umusaruro w’inyigisho 1.3: Gutarama Kinyarwanda akoresheje ubuvanganzo gakondo bufatiye

ku mwuga

Ibiranga igitaramo

nyarwanda.

Abataramyi

Insanganyamatsik

o

Urubuga

Ibyizihiza

igitaramo

o Umwitozo wo guhanga utwivugo duto dusingiza ibikoresho by’umwuga akora.

o Umwitozo wo gutarama mu matsinda mato

- Ibitaboby’ikiboneza mvugo)


n’inkoranyamuga


activities

Imfashanyigisho


Yakoresheje neza ikomorazina n’ikomoranshinga mu kunguka amagambo

mashya.

185 | P a g e

utwivugo dusingiza

ibikoresho by’umwuga.

Injyana y’ubuvanganzo

gakondo bushingiye ku

mwuga.

Insubirajwi

isubirajambo



Gihamya Isuzuma


Inyandiko

Ibibazo n’ibisubizo

Umwitozo wo gutarama.


Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho 1: yagaragaje Ibiranga igitaramo nyarwanda

Abataramyi

Insanganyamatsiko

Urubuga

Ibyizihiza igitaramo

Ikitabwaho 2: yahanze utwivugo dusingiza ibikoresho by’umwuga

Ikitabwaho 3: yamuritse utwivugo akurikije injyana y’ubuvanganzo gakondo

bushingiye ku mwuga

Insubirajwi


Yataramye kinyarwanda akoresheje ubuvanganzo gakondo bufatiye ku

mwuga.

186 | P a g e

isubirajambo

Umwanzuro

187 | P a g e

LU 3: Gukoresha Ikinyarwanda kiboneye agaragaza ibyiza

by’ikoranabuhanga mu iterambere ry’umwuga no gutandukanya ubwoko bw’inshinga.

Umusaruro w’inyigisho 2.1: Gusoma no gusesengura neza umwandiko ku nsanganyamatsiko

y’ikoranabuhanga n’iterambere ry’umwuga.

Gusoma umwandiko ku

nsanganyamatsiko

y’ikoranabuhanga n’iterambere

ry’umwuga

Ingero zifatika zihamya

akamaro k’ikorabuhanga mu

iterambere ry’umwuga

o Umwitozo wo gusoma

umwandiko ku

nsanganyamatsiko

y’ikoranabuhanga

n’iterambere ry’umwuga

o Kujya impaka mu matsinda ,

bungurana ibitekerezo ,

banatanga ingero zifatika ku

kamaro k’ikoranabuhanga mu


- Ibitabo bikubiyemo imyandiko yerekeye ikoranabuhanga n’iterambere ry’umurimo , ibitabo by’ikibonezamvugo;

- Furashi disiki - Ikibaho; - Marikeri; - Murandasi; - Inkoranyamagambo

n’inkoranyamuga; - Ibikoresho

by’ikoranabuhanga;

2


1. Gusoma no gusesengura neza umwandiko ku

nsanganyamatsiko


2. Gutandukanya neza inshinga mburabuzi, inshinga iri mu mbundo

n’inshinga itondaguye.

3. Gukoresha neza inshinga mburabuzi munteruro.

Amasaha 6


activities

Imfashanyigisho

Learning Unity

188 | P a g e



Gihamya Isuzuma


Inyandiko


Imyitozo ku nsanganyamatsiko y’akamaro k’ikoranabuhanga ku

kamaro k’umwuga


Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho 1: Yasomye neza anasesengura umwandiko ku nsanganyamatsiko

y’ikoranabuhanga n’iterambere ry’umwuga yubahiriza utwatuzo n’isesekaza.

Ikitabwaho 2: Yatanze ingero zifatika zihamya akamaro k’ikorabuhanga mu


Umwanzuro

Umusaruro w’inyigisho 2.2. Gutandukanya neza inshinga mburabuzi, inshinga iri mu mbundo

n’inshinga itondaguye mu gukora interuro yuzuye y’Ikinyarwanda.

Inshoza y’inshinga

mburabuzi,

inshinga iri mu

mbundo

o Imyitozo ku mikoreshereze y’inshinga mu nteruro z’Ikinyarwanda.

- Ibitabo bikubiyemo imyandiko yerekeye ikoranabuhanga n’iterambere ry’umurimo ;


activities

Imfashanyigisho


Yasomye anasesengura neza umwandiko ku nsanganyamatsiko


189 | P a g e

n’inshinga

itondaguye.

Ingero z’inshinga

mburabuzi

n’imikoreshereze

yazo.

Ni

Si

Ibihe bikuru

by’inshinga

Indagihe

Inzagihe

impitagihe

Gutandukanya

inshinga iri mu

mbundo,

itondaguye

n’idatondaguye.

o Imyitozo yo gutandukanya inshinga iri mu mbundo, itondaguye n’idatondaguye.

o Imyotozo mu matsinda ku mikoreshereze y’inshinga mu nteruro

ibitabo by’ikibonezamvugo;

- Furashi disiki - Ikibaho; - Marikeri; - Murandasi; - Mudasobwa - Inkoranyamagambo





Gihamya Isuzuma


Inyandiko

Ibibazo n’ibisubizo

Imyitozo ku ikoreshwa ry’inshinga mu nteruro


Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho 1: Yasobanuye neza Inshoza y’inshinga mburabuzi, inshinga iri mu mbundo n’inshinga

itondaguye

Ikitabwaho 2: Ingero z’inshinga mburabuzi n’imikoreshereze yazo.


Yatandukanyije neza inshinga mburabuzi, inshinga iri mu mbundo

n’inshinga itondaguye mu gukora interuro yuzuye y’Ikinyarwanda.

190 | P a g e

Ni

Si

Ikitabwaho 3: yasobanuye ibihe bikuru by’inshinga

Indagihe

Inzagihe

impitagihe

Ikitabwaho 4: yatandukanyije inshinga iri mu mbundo, itondaguye

n’idatondaguye

Umwanzuro

Umusaruro w’inyigisho 2.3 : Gukoresha neza inshinga mburabuzi munteruro.

Ingero z’inshinga

mburabuzi:

Inshinga

mburabuzi

“NI”

Inshinga

mburabuzi”SI

”

Imikoreshereze

y’inshinga mburabuzi

mu nteruro:

Mu ndango

yemeza.

Amau ndango

ihakana.

o Imyitozo ku mikoreshereze y’inshinga mburabuzi.

- Ibitabo bikubiyemo imyandiko yerekeye ikoranabuhanga n’iterambere ry’umurimo ; ibitabo by’ikibonezamvugo;

- Furashi disiki - Ikibaho; - Marikeri; - Murandasi; - Mudasobwa - Inkoranyamagambo



.



activities

Imfashanyigisho

191 | P a g e


Gihamya Isuzuma

Inyandiko Imyitozo yanditse


Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho 1: Ingero z’ inshinga mburabuzi zatanzwe .

Yatanze urugero rw’inshinga “si”

Yatanze urugero rw’inshinga “ni”

Ikitabwaho 2: Yakoresheresheje neza inshinga mburabuzi mu nteruro

Yakoresheje inshinga “si” mu ndango ihakana.

Yakoresheje inshinga “ni” mu ndango yemeza

Umwanzuro


Yatandukanyije neza inshinga mburabuzi, inshinga iri mu mbundo

n’inshinga itondaguye mu gukora interuro yuzuye y’Ikinyarwanda

192 | P a g e

Imbumbe

LU 3: Gukoresha Ikinyarwanda kiboneye uwiga agaragaza ububi

bw’ibiyobyabwenge mu rubyiruko no kugaragaza mu izina mbonera amategeko y’igenamajwi agendanye n’ingombajwi ziburizwamo n’izihinduka izindi.

3



nsanganyamatsiko

y’ububi bw’ibiyobyabwenge mu rubyiruko.

2. Kugaragaza mu izina mbonera amategeko y’igenamajwi

agendanye

n’ingombajwi ziburizwamo.

3. Kugaragaza mu izina mbonera amategeko y’igenamajwi agendanye

n’ingombajwi zizihinduka izindi.

Amasaha 6



Gusoma umwandiko ku nsanganyamatsiko y’ububi bw’ibiyobyabwenge mu rubyiruko;

Ingero z’ibiyobyabwenge:

Mugo Urumogi Kanyanga Mayirungi Kokayine

Ingero z’ingaruka mbi z’ibiyobyabwenge mu rubyiruko:

Gucikiriza amashuri

o Gusoma umwandiko yuhahiriza utwatuzo n’isesekaza

o Kujya impaka zigamije kungurana ibitekerezo ku ngaruka mbi z’ibiyobyabwenge.

o Gusoma bucece umwandiko

- Ibitabo bikubiyemo imyandiko ku bubi bw’ibiyobyabwenge mu rubyiruko;

- Ibitabo by’ikibonezamvugo


n’inkoranyamuga.


activities

Imfashanyigisho

193 | P a g e

Kwishora mu ngeso mbi

Kuba umutwaro ku muryango no ku gihugu

Kwiyahura Kwandura

indwara zinyuranye.



Gihamya Isuzuma


inyandiko

- Imyitozo yanditse

- Ibibazo biziguye n’ibitaziguye


Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho 1: Yasomye neza umwandiko ku nsanganyamatsiko y’ububi bw’ibiyobyabwenge mu

rubyiruko

Ikitabwaho 2: Ingero z’ibiyobyabwenge:

Mugo

Urumogi

Kanyanga

Mayirungi

IKitabwaho 3: Yatanze Ingero z’ingaruka mbi z’ibiyobyabwenge mu rubyiruko

Gucikiriza amashuri




194 | P a g e

Kwishora mu ngeso mbi

Kuba umutwaro ku muryango no ku gihugu

Kwiyahura

Kwandura indwara zinyuranye

Umwanzuro

Umusaruro w’inyigisho 3.3: Kugaragaza mu izina mbonera amategeko y’igenamajwi agendanye

n’ingombajwi zihinduka izindi

Amazina mbonera:

Imyumbati

Indabo

Udutebo

Agatebo

Amategeko

y’igenamajwi

agendanye

n’ingombajwi

zihinduka izindi:

n m/-n;b;p

r d/n-

t d/-GR

k g /-GR

o Imyitozo yo kugaragaza amategeko y’igenamajwi agaragaramo ingombajwi zihinduka izindi.

o Imikoro mu matsinda

o Ibitabo bikubiyemo imyandiko ku bubi bw’ibiyobyabwenge mu rubyiruko;

o Ibitabo by’ikibonezamvugo

o Furashi disiki o Ikibaho o Marikeri o Murandasi o Inkoranyamagambo

n’inkoranyamuga.



activities

Imfashanyigisho


Yagaragaje amategeko y’igenamajwi agendanye n’ingombajwi

zihinduka izindi mu mazina mbonera

195 | P a g e


Gihamya Isuzuma

Amajwi

Inyandiko

- Imyitozo yanditse mu kugaragaza amategeko y’igenamajwi



Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho 1 : Yatanze ingero z’amazina mbonera agaragaramo

amategeko y’igenamajwi agaragaza inyajwi zihinduka izindi

Imyumbati

Indabo

Udutebo

Agatebo

Ikitabwaho 2: Amategeko y’igenamajwi agendanye n’ingombajwi zihinduka izindi yagaragajwe

mu mazina mbonera

n m/- n ; b ; p

r d/n-

t d/-GR

k g /-GR

Umwanzuro

196 | P a g e

Imbumbe

LU 4: Gukoresha Ikinyarwanda kiboneye uwiga agaragaza uburyo bunyuranye bwo gufata neza ibidukikije no gukoresha indangahantu icyungo” na“ mu nteruro

4


1. Gusoma no gusesengura neza umwandiko ku nsanganyamatsiko yo

gufata neza ibidukikije.

2. Kugaragaza neza indangahantu mu nteruro zitandukanye.

3. Gukoresha neza icyungo” na“ mu nteruro ziboneye uwiga yihimbiye.

Amasaha 6

4. Umusaruro w’inyigisho 4.1 Gusoma no gusesengura neza umwandiko ku

nsanganyamatsiko yo gufata neza ibidukikije.

Gusoma umwandiko ku nsanganyamatsiko yerekeye gufata neza ibidukikije;

Ingero z’ibikorwa by’abanyamwuga bishobora kwangiza ibidukikije:

Ibikorwa bishingiye ku mwuga w’ubukanishi:

Kumena

vidange mu migezi

Gutwika amapine ashaje

o Gusubiza ibibazo byo kumva umwandiko n’ inyunguramagambo.

o Gusoma bucece. o Gusoma mu matsinda. o Gukorera mu matsinda,

bungurana ibitekerezo ku ngamba zo kurengera ibidukikije.

o Kujya impaka ku ngaruka zo kwangiza ibidukikije.

o Umwitozo wo gukoresha neza indangahantu mu nteruro

- Ibitabo bikubiyemo imyandiko ku kurengera ibidukikije;

- Ibitabo byikibonezamvugo;

- Furashi disiki - Ikibaho; -Marikeri; -Murandasi; - Inkoranyamagambo

n’inkoranyamuga; - Amafoto.


Imfashanyigisho

197 | P a g e

Ibikorwa bishingiye ku mwuga w’ububaji

Gutema ibiti bidakuze

Ivumbi riva mu ibarizo

Ibikorwa bikomoka ku mwuga w’ubworozi:

Kuragira amatungo ku gasozi

Gutwika imisozi bashaka ubwatsi butoshye



Gihamya Isuzuma


Inyandiko


Imyitozo yanditse


Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho 1: Yasomye neza umwandiko ku nsanganyamatsiko yerekeye gufata neza ibidukikije;

Ikitabwaho 2. Ingero z’ibikorwa by’abanyamwuga bishobora kwangiza ibidukikije zagaragajwe.


Yasomye anasesengura neza umwandiko ku nsanganyamatsiko yo

gufata neza ibidukikije.

198 | P a g e

Ibikorwa bishingiye ku mwuga w’ubukanishi: Kumena vidange mu migezi no gutwika amapine ashaje

Ibikorwa bishingiye ku mwuga w’ububaji: gutema ibiti bidakuze n’ivumbi riva mu ibarizo

Ibikorwa bikomoka ku mwuga w’ubworozi: Kuragira amatungo ku gasozi no gutwika imisozi bashaka ubwatsi butoshye

Ikitabwaho 3: Indangahantu mu nteruro zakoreshejwe neza:

Indangahantu “ku” ihinduka” kuri,”

Indangahantu “mu” ihinduka “muri”

Indangahantu” i”

Umwanzuro

Umusaruro w’inyigisho 4.2: Kugaragaza neza indangahantu mu nteruro zitandukanye.

Ikoreshwa ry’indangahantu mu nteruro: Indangahantu“ku”

ihinduka” kuri,” Indangahantu“mu”

ihinduka “muri “ Indangahantu” i”

o Imyitozo ikozwe

n’umuntu ku giti cye

o Imyitozo mu matsinda



- Furashi disiki - Ikibaho; -Marikeri; -Murandasi; - Inkoranyamagambo

n’inkoranyamuga;

- Amafoto



activities

Imfashanyigisho

199 | P a g e


Gihamya Isuzuma

Amajwi

Inyandiko


- Imyitozo yandikitse ku mikoresheze y’indangahantu mu

nteruro.


Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho:Indandangahantu zakoreshejwe neza mu nteruro

Yakoresheje Indangahantu “mu”

Yakoresheje Indangahantu “mu”

Yakoresheje Indangahantu “i”

Umwanzuro

Umusaruro w’inyigisho 4.3: Gukoresha neza icyungo” na“ mu nteruro ziboneye uwiga

yihimbiye yihimbiye.

Imikoresherezey’incyungo “na”mu nteruro: Icyungo “na”

kirakatwa kigahinduka “n”imbere y’ijambo ritangiwe n’inyajwi.

o Imyitozo ikozwe

n’umuntu ku giti cye

o Imyitozo mu matsinda



- Furashi disiki - Ikibaho;


activities

Imfashanyigisho


Yakoresheje neza indangahantu mu nteruro

200 | P a g e

Icyungo“na’” gihinduka “no”imbere y’inshinga iri mu mbundo.

-Marikeri; -Murandasi; - Inkoranyamagambo

n’inkoranyamuga;

- Amafoto

Isuzuma mbonezanyigisho 4.3


Gihamya Isuzuma

Amajwi

Inyandiko

Ibibazo bifunguye n’ibifunze.

Imyitozo yanditse


Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho : Icyungo” na“ cyakoreshejwe neza mu nteruro.

Yakoze interuro irimo icyungo “na”

Yakoze interuro irimo icyungo “na” cyakaswe kigahinduka “n’”imbere y’ijambo ritangiwe n’inyajwi.

Yakoze interuro irimo icyungo “na” gihinduka “no”imbere y’inshinga iri mu mbundo.

Umwanzuro


Yakoresheje neza icyungo” na“ mu nteruro ziboneye.

201 | P a g e

Imbumbe

LU 5: Gukoresha Ikinyarwanda kiboneye uwiga agaragaza akamaro

k’ubutabazi bw’ibanze no gukoresha impakanyi n’indango z’inshinga.

5



nsanganyamatsiko y’ akamaro k’ubutabazi bw’ibanze

2. Gukoresha neza impakanyi mu nteruro ziboneye . 3. Gukoresha neza indango z’inshinga mu nteruro .

Amasaha 6


Ku kamaro k’ubutabazi bw’ibanze

Inshoza y’ubutabazi bw’ibanze

Gusoma no gusesengura umwandiko ku nsanganyamatsiko ku kamaro k’ubutabazi bw’ibanze

Ingero z’ibikorwa by’ubutabazi bw’ibanze:

Gupfuka ibisebe

Gupfubya ubushye

Gufasha uwavunitse

Kongerera umwuka uwukeneye

o Gukorera mu matsinda, bungurana ibitekerezo ku nsanganyamatsiko ivugwa y’ubutabazi bw’ibanze

o Kujya impaka ku ngaruka z’ingeso yo kudatabara abari mu kaga no kugaragaza ibyiza byo kubatabara.

- Ibitabo bikubiyemo imyandiko;

- Ibitabo by’ikibonezamvugo ;

- Furashi disiki - Ikibaho; - Marikeri; - Murandasi; - Inkoranyamagambo; - Amabwiriza ya Minisitiri

N0 001/2014 yo ku wa 08/10/2014 agenga imyandikire y’Ikinyarwanda nk’uko yasohotse mu Igazeti ya Leta N0 41 bis yo ku wa 13/10/2014.


activities

Imfashanyigisho

202 | P a g e

Gupfubya ubushye



Gihamya Isuzuma


Inyandiko

Ibibazo bifunze n’ibifunguye.

imyitozo


Yego Oya

kitabwaho 1: Yasobanuye neza Inshoza y’ubutabazi bw’ibanze

Ikitabwaho 2: Yatanze Ingero z’ibikorwa by’ubutabazi bw’ibanze

Gupfuka ibisebe

Kongerera umwuka uwukeneye

Gufasha uwavunitse

Gupfubya ubushye

Umwanzuro



Ku kamaro k’ubutabazi bw’ibanze.

203 | P a g e

Umusaruro w’inyigisho 5.2: Kugaragaza neza impakanyi mu nteruro zitandukanye.

Imikoreshereze y’impakanyi mu nteruro: impakanyi “si’” impakanyi “nti” impakanyi “ta” impakanyi “i”

o Imyitozo mu matsinda ku mikoreshereze y’impakanyi.

o Imyitozo y’umuntu ku giti ke

- Ibitaboby’ikiboneza mvugo - Furashi disiki - Ikibaho - Marikeri - Murandasi - Mudasobwa - Inkoranyamagambo

n’inkoranyamuga



Gihamya Isuzuma


inyandiko

Imyitozo yanditse

Ibibazo biziguye n’ibitaziguye


Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho 1: Impakanyi zakoreshejwe neza mu nteruro.

impakanyi “si’”

impakanyi “nti”

impakanyi “ta”

impakanyi “i”


activities

Imfashanyigisho


Yakoresheje neza impakanyi mu nteruro zitandukanye.

204 | P a g e

Umwanzuro

Umusaruro w’inyigisho 5.3: Gukoresha indango z’inshinga mu nteruro.

Indango z’inshinga:

Indango yemeza

Indango

ihakana

Imyitozo ku ndango z’inshinga - Ibitaboby’ikiboneza mvugo - Furashi disiki - Ikibaho - Marikeri - Murandasi - Mudasobwa - Inkoranyamagambo

n’inkoranyamuga



Gihamya Isuzuma


inyandiko

Imyitozo yanditse

Ibibazo biziguye n’ibitaziguye


Yego Oya

Ikitabwaho : Indango z’inshinga zakoreshejwe neza

Indango yemeza

Ibyigwa Ibikorwa by’uwiga

activities

Imfashanyigisho


Yakoreshe neza indango z’inshinga mu nteruro.

205 | P a g e

Indango ihakana

Umwanzuro

Ibitabo n’inyandiko byifashishijwe:

1. BIZIMANA S, KAYUMBA C., (2011), Inkoranya y’ikinyarwanda mu Kinyarwanda, IRST, 2ème,

Edition

2. BIZIMANA, S., RWABUKUMBA, G., (2011), Inkoranya y’ikinyarwanda mu Kinyarwanda, IRST,

1ère Edition

3. CHARMEAUX, E., (1975), La lecture à l’école, Cédix, Paris.

4. CONFÉRENCE DES MINISTRES DE L’EDUCATION DES ETATS D’EXPRESSION FRANÇAISE, (1986),

Promotion et intégration des langues nationales dans les systèmes éducatifs, Librairie Honoré

Champion, Paris.

5. COUPEZ A. (1961) Grammaire Rwanda Simplifiée, Usumbura

6. Dictionnaire Rwandais-Français, Edition abrégée et adaptée par Irénée JACOB.

7. EDITION BAKAME (2010) Ikinyarwanda Ikibonezamvugo cy’amashuri abanza n’ayisumbuye,

Kigali

8. FOUNTAIN PUBLISHERS, (2011), Ikinyarwanda, Igitabo cy’umunyeshuri, Umwaka wa 4,

Fountain Publishers, Kigali

9. FOUNTAIN PUBLISHERS, (2011), Ikinyarwanda, Igitabo cy’umwarimu, Umwaka wa 5, Fountain

Publishers, Kigali

10. FOUNTAIN PUBLISHERS, (2011), Ikinyarwanda, Igitabo cy’umwarimu, Umwaka wa 6, Fountain

Publishers, Kigali

11. GAGNÉ, G., PAGÉ, M. na ARRAB, E, (2002), Didactique des langues maternelles. Questions

actuelles dans différentes régions du monde, De Boeck Universitégions du monde, De Boeck

Université, Bruxelles.

12. GASIMBA F.X (2004), Inganzo y’Ubwanditsi, Prix Kadima . Paris, OIF

13. INTEKO NYARWANDA Y’URURIMI N’UMUCO (RALC),( 2013), Indangagaciro z’Umuco w’u

Rwanda, Imfashanyigisho ibanza, Kigali

14. KAGIRANEZA Z. (1989), Igitaramo ku mateka y’u Rwanda, MINESUPRESS

15. MINEDUC (2008), Ikinyarwanda : Imyandiko mfashanyigisho, Igitabo cy’Umunyeshuri, NCDC,

Kigali

16. MINISTERI Y’AMASHURI ABANZA N’AYISUMBUYE (1986), Ikinyarwanda: Ikibonezamvugo cyo

mu Cyiciro cya Gatatu, Kigali

17. UNIVERSITY OF RWANDA/COLLEGE OF EDUCATION (2014), Umusogongero ku Buvanganzo

Nyarwanda , Kigali.

18. VANHOVE J. (1941), Essai de Droit Coutumier du Ruanda, Bruxelles, Librairie Falk fil

206 | P a g e

Competence

C C M Q S 4 0 1 - PROVIDING QUALITY CUSTOMER SERVICE

CCMQS401 Provide quality customer service


Credits: 3 30

Sector: All

Sub-sector: All


Purpose statement

This module describes the skills, knowledge and attitude required to provide quality customer service and deal with any matter related to business during, before and after a service delivery. The module will allow the participant to identify opportunities for products and services delivery and reflect on information received to devise changes and suggest coping strategies.

207 | P a g e

Moreover, the trainee will also develop and use communication techniques intended for the management of the complaints and ways of recording customer information.


Not applicable







1. Develop and maintain product, service and market knowledge.

1.1 Proper identification of opportunities and use of formal and informal research to develop and maintain knowledge of products and services.

1.2 Appropriate use of customer feedback and workplace observation to evaluate products, services and promotional initiatives and identify changes in customer preferences, needs and expectations.

1.3 Effective sharing of market, product and service knowledge obtained with colleagues to enhance the effectiveness of the team.

1.4 Effective suggestion of ideas to appropriate person for product and service adjustments to meet customer needs for future planning according to organization policy.

2. Provide a quality service experience to customers.

1.1. Determination and clarification of customer preferences, needs and expectations.

1.2. Proper offering of accurate information about appropriate products and services to customers to meet their needs and expectations.

1.3. Anticipation of customer preferences needs and expectations throughout the service experience and provide products and services in a timely manner, appropriate to individual needs and preferences, and according to organization standards.

1.4. Offering possible extras and add-ons appropriately and provision of personalized and additional services and products where appropriate.

208 | P a g e

1.5. Proactive promotion of products and services at appropriate opportunities according to current organization goals and promotional focus and appropriate employment of selling

3. Deal with complaints

and difficult customer

service situations.

3.1 Proper use of questioning techniques to establish and agree on the nature, possible cause and details of the complaint or difficult customer service situation with the customer and assessment of the impact on the customer of the situation.

3.2 Effective use of communication techniques to assist in the management of the complaint and handle the situation sensitively, courteously and discreetly.

3.3 Proper determination of possible options to resolve the complaint and prompt analysis and decision on the best solution, taking into account any organization constraints.

3.4 Appropriate use of techniques to turn complaints into opportunities to demonstrate high quality customer service.

3.5 Effective provision of feedback on complaints to appropriate personnel in order to avoid future occurrence.

3.6 Reflection and evaluation of complaint and solution to enhance response to future complaints or difficult service situations.

4. Manage and use

information about

clients and customers

3.1 Proper determination and record of customer information where appropriate to provide personalized service.

3.2 Perfect development and maintaining of knowledge of organization promotional initiatives and perfect implementation where appropriate.

3.3 Proactive provision of enhanced products and services to clients and customers based on client information.

209 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.1: Identify opportunities and use formal and informal research to develop and maintain knowledge of products and services.

Differentiation of products

and services

o Large group discussion o Role plays o Small group activity o Brainstorming o Question and answer


Learning unit

LU 1: Develop and maintain product, service and market knowledge.

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Identify opportunities and use formal and informal research to develop and maintain knowledge of products and services.

2. Use customer feedback and workplace observation to evaluate products, services and promotional initiatives and identify changes in customer preferences, needs and expectations.

3. Share market, product and service knowledge obtained with colleagues to enhance the effectiveness of the team

4. Suggest ideas to appropriate person for product and service adjustments to meet customer needs for future planning.

5 Hours

Content Learning

activities

Resources

210 | P a g e

Tangibility vs intangibility

Production vs interaction

Perishability vs imperishability

Need vs relationship Quantity Inseparability Quality Returnability Value perspective Shelf line

Being aware of your products and services

Importance of knowing your products and services

Tips on knowing your products and services

Using conventional and creative sources of information to learn about your products or services

Being honest about shortcomings

Turning product features into benefits

Identification of opportunities to develop and maintain knowledge of products and services Membership of industry

associations and networks

211 | P a g e

Conventional and creative sources of information

Formal and informal research techniques Discussions with

colleagues

Reading organization information

Research of product and service information brochures

General media Attendance at

conferences, trade shows and industry events

Distributing surveys and questionnaires





Written evidence

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking Essay (short responses / extended responses)


Proper identification of opportunities and use of formal and informal

research to develop and maintain knowledge of products and services.

212 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Products and services are well differentiated

Tangibility vs intangibility

Production vs interaction

Perishability vs imperishability

Need vs relationship

Quantity

Inseparability

Quality

Returnability

Value perspective

Shelf line

Indicator: products and services are well known

Importance of knowing your products and services

Tips on knowing your products and services

Using conventional and creative sources of information to learn about your products or services

Being honest about shortcomings

Turning product features into benefits

Indicator: opportunities to develop and maintain knowledge of products and services are well identified

Membership of industry associations and networks

Conventional and creative sources of information

Indicator: Formal and informal research techniques

Discussions with colleagues

Reading organization information

Research of product and service information brochures

General media

Attendance at conferences, trade shows and industry events

Distributing surveys and questionnaires

Observation

213 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.2: Use customer feedback and workplace observation to evaluate products, services and promotional initiatives and identify changes in customer preferences, needs and expectations.

Products and services

promotional

initiatives

Tours and transport Conferences and

conventions Function facilities Entertainment Shopping services Restaurant facilities Food and beverage Add-on services Special offers or

packages.

Ways to determine customer preferences, needs and expectations:

Active listening Questioning Observation Recognition of non-

verbal signs

Factors influencing customer preferences, needs and expectations:

Age Gender Social and cultural

characteristics Prior knowledge Special needs

Ways to satisfy customer preferences, needs and expectations:

Friendliness

Courtesy

Value for money

o Large group discussion o Role plays o Small group activity o Brainstorming o Question and answer


Content Learning

activities

Resources

214 | P a g e

Prompt or timely

service

Assistance

Empathy and support

Comfort

New experience

Basic needs for food,

shelter, transport or

other services.





Written

Performance

Oral

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Ticking Essay (short responses / extended responses) Observation checklist


Appropriate use of customer feedback and workplace observation to evaluate products, services and promotional initiatives and identify

changes in customer preferences, needs and expectations.

215 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: products and services promotional initiatives are well identified

Tours and transport

Conferences and conventions

Function facilities

Entertainment

Shopping services

Restaurant facilities

Food and beverage

Add-on services

Special offers or packages.

Indicator: ways to determine customer preferences, needs and expectations are well applied

Active listening

Questioning

Observation

Recognition of non-verbal signs

Indicator: factors influencing customer preferences, needs and expectations are well identified

Age

Gender

Social and cultural characteristics

Prior knowledge

Special needs

Indicator: ways to satisfy customer preferences, needs and expectations are applied

Friendliness

Courtesy

Value for money

Prompt or timely service

Assistance

216 | P a g e

Empathy and support

Comfort

New experience

Basic needs for food, shelter, transport or other services.

Observation

217 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.3: Share market, product and service knowledge obtained with colleagues to enhance the effectiveness of the team

Reasons for knowledge

sharing in the workplace

Preserving the knowledge of experienced employees

Improving organizational productivity and efficiency

Helping manage change in the organization

Managing future risks

Improving decision making

Helping innovate better

Boosting collaboration

Sources of knowledge in at workplace

meetings reviews audits processes performance

assessments market research customer

feedback

Methods for promoting knowledge sharing in the workplace Communication Office space

o Group discussion

o Role play

o Presentation


Content Learning

activities

Resources

218 | P a g e





Team building activities

Safe space Creation of a

collaborative workplace

Encouraging supportive workplace culture

Offering incentives for innovation

Inspiring innovation by building trust

Offering comprehensive employee training

Making resources readily available

Utilizing communication tools

Implementing a long-term knowledge-sharing strategy

Creating a knowledge-transfer plan

Effects of not sharing knowledge at workplace Waste of time Repetition of the

same mistakes Knowledge loss Slowing innovation


Effective sharing of market, product and service knowledge obtained with

colleagues to enhance the effectiveness of the team.

219 | P a g e

Written evidence

Oral evidence


Multiple choice


Matching

Ticking

Essay (short responses / extended responses)


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: reasons to share knowledge of market, product and service at workplace are well identified

Preserving the knowledge of experienced employees

Improving organizational productivity and efficiency

Helping manage change in the organization

Managing future risks

Improving decision making

Helping innovate better

Boosting collaboration

Indicator: sources of knowledge at workplace are well identified

220 | P a g e

Meetings

Reviews

Audits

Processes

performance assessments

market research

customer feedback

Indicator: methods for promoting knowledge sharing at workplace are explained

Communication

Office space

Team building activities

Safe space

Creation of a collaborative workplace

Encouraging supportive workplace culture

Offering incentives for innovation

Inspiring innovation by building trust

Offering comprehensive employee training

Making resources readily available

Utilizing communication tools

Implementing a long-term knowledge-sharing strategy

Creating a knowledge-transfer plan

Indicator: effects of not sharing knowledge at workplace are identified

Waste of time

Repetition of the same mistakes

Knowledge loss

Slowing innovation

Observation

221 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.4: Suggest ideas to appropriate person for product and service adjustments to meet customer needs for future planning

Product and service adjustment

Definition of product and service adjustment

Product and service adjustment procedure

Common types of product and service adjustment

Rework a current product/service

Eliminate or discontinue a current product/service

Addition of a new product/service

Importance of product and service adjustment on customer satisfaction

Challenges with product/service adjustment

Spreading the company too thin

Cannibalizing your other product/service offerings

Alignment of the adjustments with the brand

Impact of the adjustments on brand loyalty

o Individual reflection o Brainstorming o Large group discussion o Role play



Content Learning

activities

Resources

222 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral

Performance

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Ticking Essay (short responses / extended responses) Presentation Observation checklist

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: product and service adjustment is well described

Definition of product and service adjustment

Product and service adjustment procedure

Common types of product and service adjustment

Rework a current product/service

Eliminate or discontinue a current product/service

Addition of a new product/service

Importance of product and service adjustment on customer satisfaction Indicator: challenges with product/service adjustment are identified

Spreading the company too thin

Cannibalizing your other product/service offerings

Alignment of the adjustments with the brand Impact of the adjustments on brand loyalty

Observation


Effective suggestion of ideas to appropriate person for product and service

adjustments to meet customer needs for future planning according to

organization policy.

223 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 2: Provide a quality service experience to customers.

2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Determine and clarify customer preferences, needs and expectations 2. Offer accurate information about appropriate products and services

to customers. 3. Anticipate customer preferences needs and expectations throughout

the service experience and provide products and services appropriate to individual needs and preferences

4. Offer possible extras and add-ons appropriately and provide personalized and additional services and products where appropriate

5. Promote products and services at appropriate opportunities

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 2.1: Determine and clarify customer preferences, needs and expectations.

Identification of customer research steps

Identification of customers’ identity

Being aware of why customers shop

Identification of preferred shopping methods

Considering customers’ spending habits

Finding out what customers think of you

o Experience sharing o Brainstorming o Trainer guide o Individual reflection o Large group discussion o Role play


Content Learning

activities

Resources

224 | P a g e

Identification of customer needs and preferences

Definition of customer needs and preferences

Methods to identify customer needs and preferences

The importance of researching customers’ needs and preferences





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Ticking Essay (short responses / extended responses) Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: customer research steps are well identified Customers’ identity The reason why customers shop Preferred shopping methods Customers’ spending habits What customers think of you


Proper determination and clarification of customer preferences, needs

and expectations.

225 | P a g e

Indicator: customer needs and preferences are well identified The terms customer needs and preferences are defined Methods to identify customer needs and preferences are identified The importance of researching customers’ needs and preferences is explained

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.2: Offer accurate information about appropriate products and services to customers

Needs and expectations of customers on products and services

General features Special features Benefits Disadvantages Price Special offers Availability How to purchase or

order

o Experience sharing o Brainstorming o Presentation by trainer o Individual reflection o Large group discussion o Role play






Written evidence

Oral evidence


Multiple choice True or false question Matching Ticking

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper offering of accurate information about appropriate products and

services to customers to meet their needs and expectations.

226 | P a g e

Essay (short responses / extended responses) Presentation Observation checklist

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: needs and expectations of customers on products and services are well identified

General features

Special features

Benefits

Disadvantages

Price

Special offers

Availability How to purchase or order

Learning Outcome 2.3: Anticipate customer preferences needs and expectations throughout the service experience and provide products and services appropriate to individual needs and preferences

Steps to anticipate customer needs and preferences

Observation Looking for

patterns Taking action Prevention

Timely customer service Definition of

timely customer service

o Role play o Simulation o Brainstorming


Content Learning

activities

Resources

227 | P a g e

Importance of timely customer service





Written evidence

Oral evidence


Multiple choice True or false question Matching Ticking Essay (short responses / extended responses) Presentation Observation checklist

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: steps to anticipate customer needs and preferences are well identified Observation Looking for patterns Taking action Prevention

Indicator: timely customer service is well described Definition of timely customer service Importance of timely customer service


Anticipation of customer preferences needs and expectations throughout

the service experience and provide products and services in a timely

manner, appropriate to individual needs and preferences, and according

to organization standards.

228 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 2.4: Offer possible extras and add-ons and provide personalized and additional services and products.

Extras and add-ons selling

Definition of extras and add-ons

Successful strategies for extras and Add-ons selling

Common Add-on sales

Benefits of offering Add-ons

Ways to improve customer service Measuring and

monitoring customer service experience

Collecting customer feedback

Monitor and respond to customers on social media and review sites

Boosting customer satisfaction with a self-service experience

Tuning in to your customer service team

Gathering customer service team feedback

Improving customer service skills with active listening and empathy

Maintaining good customer service

o Brainstorming o Presentation by trainer o Individual reflection o Large group discussion o Question and answer o Debate

- Reference books - Online materials - Scholarly materials

Content Learning

activities

Resources

229 | P a g e

with expanded knowledge





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Ticking Essay (short responses / extended responses) Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: extras and Add-ons selling is well explained Extras and Add-ons are defined Successful strategies for extras and Add-ons selling are identified Common Add-on sales are identified Benefits of offering Add-ons are identified

Indicator: ways to improve customer service are well explained Measuring and monitoring customer service experience Collecting customer feedback Monitor and respond to customers on social media and review sites Boosting customer satisfaction with a self-service experience Tuning in to your customer service team Gathering customer service team feedback Improving customer service skills with active listening and empathy Maintaining good customer service with expanded knowledge


Offering possible extras and add-ons appropriately and provision of

personalized and additional services and products where appropriate.

230 | P a g e

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.5: Promote products and services at appropriate opportunities and employ selling techniques to encourage usage and purchase.

Methods for promoting products and services

Displays Promotions special offers and

deals menus and specials word of mouth up-selling.

Selling techniques: Serving Helping Advising building rapport with

customers arousing interest.

o Large group discussion o Question and answer o Debate o Observation o Role play

- Reference books - Online materials - Scholarly materials - Role play scenario





Written evidence

Oral evidence


Multiple choice True or false question Matching Ticking

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proactive promotion of products and services at appropriate opportunities

according to current organization goals and promotional focus and

appropriate employment of selling

231 | P a g e

Essay (short responses / extended responses) Observation checklist

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: methods for promoting products and services are well identified

Displays

Promotions

Special offers and deals

menus and specials

Word of mouth

Up-selling

Indicator: products and services selling techniques are well identified

Serving

Helping

Advising

Building rapport with customers Arising interest

Observation

232 | P a g e

Learning unit

LU 3: Deal with complaints and difficult customer service situations.

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Use questioning techniques to establish and agree on the nature, possible cause and details of the complaint or difficult customer service situation with the customer and assess the impact on the customer of the situation.

2. Use communication techniques to assist in the management of the complaint and handle the situation sensitively, courteously and discreetly.

3. Determine possible options to resolve the complaint and analyze and decide on the best solution

4. Use techniques to turn complaints into opportunities to demonstrate high quality customer service.

5. Provide feedback on complaints to appropriate personnel in order to avoid future occurrence

6. Reflect on and evaluate complaint and solution to enhance response to future complaints or difficult service situations.

9 Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1: Use questioning techniques to establish and agree on the nature, possible cause and details of the complaint or difficult customer service situation with the customer and assess the impact on the customer of the situation.

Questioning techniques Open questions Closed questions Funnel questions Probing/trigger

questions Leading/reflective

questions Rhetorical

questions

Using questioning techniques

When and when not to use

o Small group discussion o Individual work o Role play o Simulation


Content Learning

activities

Resources

233 | P a g e

questioning techniques





Written evidence

Oral evidence



Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: questioning techniques are identified

Open questions

Closed questions

Funnel questions

Probing/trigger questions

Leading/reflective questions

Rhetorical questions

Indicator: questioning techniques are used appropriately

When and when not to use questioning techniques

Observation


Proper use of questioning techniques to establish and agree on the nature,

possible cause and details of the complaint or difficult customer service

situation with the customer and assessment of the impact on the customer

of the situation.

234 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.2: Use communication techniques to assist in the management of the complaint and handle the situation sensitively, courteously and discreetly.

Communication techniques Listening and active

listening Asking questions to

gain information, clarify ambiguities and adequately understand requirements

Rephrasing and repeating questions, requests and statements to confirm that they have been correctly understood

Empathizing with the customer's situation while upholding organization policy

Non-verbal communication and recognition of non-verbal signs

Using communication techniques appropriate to different social and cultural groups

Ability to speak clearly, be understood and use appropriate language, style and tone.

o Group work o Presentation o Brainstorming o Role play



Content Learning

activities

Resources

235 | P a g e




Written evidence


Multiple choice


Matching

Ticking

Essay (short responses / extended responses)


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: communication techniques are applied while handling customer complaints Listening and active listening Asking questions to gain information, clarify ambiguities and adequately

understand requirements

Rephrasing and repeating questions, requests and statements to confirm that they have been correctly understood

Empathizing with the customer's situation while upholding organization policy Non-verbal communication and recognition of non-verbal signs Using communication techniques appropriate to different social and cultural

groups

Ability to speak clearly, be understood and use appropriate language, style and

tone.


Effective use of communication techniques to assist in the management of

the complaint and handle the situation sensitively, courteously and discreetly

236 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.3: Determine possible options to resolve the complaint and analyse and decide on the best solution

Organizational

constraints

Definition of

organizational

constraints

Factors

associated with

organizational

constraints

Aspects of complaints Emotional

aspects Logical aspects

Methods to manage and reduce stress when resolving complaints

Control Detachment Empathy Breaks Lifestyle

Proactive complaint handling

Complaints handling procedure

Listen to the complaint

Record details of the complaint

Get all the facts

Discuss options for fixing the problem

- Small group discussion - Individual work - Role play


Content Learning

activities

Resources

237 | P a g e

Act quickly

Keep your promises

Follow up





Written evidence

Oral evidence



Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: organizational constraints are well described Organizational constraints are defined

Factors associated with organizational constraints are identified

Indicator: aspects of constraints are well identified Emotional aspects are explained Logical aspects are explained

Indicator: methods to manage and reduce stress when resolving complaints are well identified

Control Detachment Empathy Breaks Lifestyle


Proper determination of possible options to resolve the complaint and

prompt analysis and decision on the best solution, taking into account any

organization constraints.

238 | P a g e

Indicator: proactive complaint handling is well discussed Complaints handling procedure is followed

Listen to the complaint Record details of the complaint Get all the facts Discuss options for fixing the problem Act quickly Keep your promises Follow up

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.4: Use techniques to turn complaints into opportunities to demonstrate high quality customer service.

Methods for transforming complaints into additional service opportunities

Adjusting one’s

mindset

Listening actively

Repeating

customers’

concerns

Being empathic

and apologize

Presenting a

solution

Taking action and

follow up

Using the feedback

High quality customer service

Ways to stand out from others to help you deliver

o Individual work o Debate o Discussion o Role play

- Reference books - Online materials - Scholarly materials - Role play scenario

Content Learning

activities

Resources

239 | P a g e

high quality customer service

Respond as quickly as possible

Know your customers

Fix your mistakes

Listen to your customers

Think long term





Written evidence

Oral evidence



Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Methods for transforming complaints into additional service opportunities are well applied


Where appropriate, proper use of techniques to turn complaints into

opportunities to demonstrate high quality customer service.

240 | P a g e

Adjusting one’s mindset Listening actively Repeating customers’ concerns Being empathic and apologize Presenting a solution Taking action and follow up

Indicator: high quality customer service is well explained Ways to stand out from others to help you deliver high quality customer

service are identified

Respond as quickly as possible Know your customers Fix your mistakes Listen to your customers Think long term

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.5: Provide feedback on complaints to appropriate personnel in order to avoid future occurrence

Description of customer feedback Definition of

customer feedback The importance of

feedback on customer complaints

Types of customer feedback

Direct customer feedback

Indirect customer feedback

o Group work o Presentation o Brainstorming o Role play


Content Learning

activities

Resources

241 | P a g e

Best practices for collecting customer feedback

Sending customer surveys

Building a community forum

Roll out a voice of the customer program

Using customer feedback

Sharing customer feedback widely

Listening and acting

Making it right, preventing customer churn

Identifying and nurturing champions

Celebrating success

Effective customer feedback giving







Effective provision of feedback on complaints to appropriate personnel in

order to avoid future occurrence.

242 | P a g e

Oral evidence


True or false question Matching Ticking Essay (short responses / extended responses) Observation checklist

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: customer feedback is well described Customer feedback is defined The importance of feedback on customer complaints is explained Types of customer feedback are identified

Direct customer feedback Indirect customer feedback

Best practices for collecting customer feedback are identified Sending customer surveys Building a community forum Roll out a voice of the customer program

Customer feedback is used effectively Customer feedback is shared widely Listening and acting is done Customer churn is prevented Champions are identified and nurture Success is celebrated

Effective customer feedback is given

Learning Outcome 3.6: Reflect on and evaluate complaint and solution to enhance response to future complaints or difficult service situations.

Customer complaint analysis Importance of

customer complaint analysis

o Individual work o Debate o Discussion o Pair work


Content Learning

activities

Resources

243 | P a g e

Questions to ask yourself before you take action

Customer complaint guidelines

Tools for analyzing customer complaints

Customer complaint checklist (5 steps checklist)

Web forms Customer service

software

Proactive complaint handling Engaging in social

listening Monitoring customer

complaint

Customer satisfaction Definition of

customer satisfaction Benefits of customer

satisfaction Increase of brand

loyalty Trust boosting Positive word of

mouth attraction Growth of

audience and sales

Types of feedback to collect for measuring customer satisfaction

Overall satisfaction

Repurchase intent Word of mouth

Steps for improving customer satisfaction

Conduct customer surveys

Monitor social media mentions

244 | P a g e

Implement constructive feedback





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Product evidence

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Ticking Essay (short responses / extended responses) Checklist for checking the product evidence

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: customer complaint analysis is well described Importance of customer complaint analysis is explained Questions to ask yourself before you take action are identified Customer complaint guidelines are established Tools for analyzing customer complaints are identified

Customer complaint checklist (5 steps checklist) Web forms Customer service software

Indicator: proactive complaint handling is well described Engaging in social listening is explained Monitoring customer complaint is explained

Indicator: customer satisfaction is well described


Reflection and evaluation of complaint and solution to enhance response

to future complaints or difficult service situations.

245 | P a g e

Definition of customer satisfaction Benefits of customer satisfaction

Increase of brand loyalty Trust boosting Positive word of mouth attraction Growth of audience and sales

Types of feedback to collect for measuring customer satisfaction Overall satisfaction Repurchase intent Word of mouth

Steps for improving customer satisfaction Conduct customer surveys Monitor social media mentions Implement constructive feedback

Observation

246 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 4.1: Determine and record customer information where appropriate to provide personalised service.

Customer information Definition of

customer information Common types of

customer information Identity

information/data Descriptive

information/data Behavioral

information/data Qualitative

information/data

Collection of customer information Legal requirements

regarding what you can do with the information you have collected

Ways to collect information on your customers

Website analytics tools

Online surveys

o Brainstorming o Large group discussion o Individual reflection o Pair work


Learning unit

LU 4: Manage and use information about clients and customers.

4

Learning Outcomes:

1. Determine and record customer information where appropriate to provide personalized service

2. Develop and maintain knowledge of organization promotional initiatives and implement where appropriate

3. Provide enhanced products and services to clients and customers 2 Hours

Content Learning

activities

Resources

247 | P a g e

Signup forms Customer

interviews Post-purchase

feedback Social media

engagement

Storing customer information Ways to store

customer information Integrate

sources Personalize data Track

conversations Systematize

client list Maintaining

customer information





Proper determination and record of customer information where

appropriate to provide personalized service.

248 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence



Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: customer information is well described Customer information is defined Common types of customer information are identified

Identity information/data Descriptive information/data Behavioral information/data Qualitative information/data

Indicator: collection of customer information is well described Legal requirements regarding what you can do with the information you

have collected are identified

Ways to collect information on your customers are identified Website analytics tools Online surveys Signup forms Customer interviews Post-purchase feedback Social media engagement

Indicator: customer information storage is well described Ways to store customer information are identified

Integrate sources Personalize data Track conversations Systematize client list

The maintaining of customer information is explained

Observation

249 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 4.2: Develop and maintain knowledge of organisation promotional initiatives and implement them where appropriate.

Benefits of promotional activities To provide

information to customers about new products or services

Creating a positive image of the company

Easy dissemination of information about the advantages of goods

Sales promotion Create an easily

recognizable logo for your business

Frequent communication with clients or customers

Further expansion of business

Types of promotional activities Personal selling Advertising Sales promotion Direct marketing Publicity Public relations Point of purchase

display Packaging Direct mail

o Brainstorming o Large group discussion o Individual reflection o Pair work o Small group activity


Content Learning

activities

Resources

250 | P a g e

Steps to successfully implement organization promotional initiatives





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Ticking Essay (short responses / extended responses)

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: benefits of promotional activities are well identified To provide information to customers about new products or services Creating a positive image of the company Easy dissemination of information about the advantages of goods Sales promotion Create an easily recognizable logo for your business Frequent communication with clients or customers Further expansion of business

Indicator: types of promotional activities are identified Personal selling Advertising Sales promotion Direct marketing Publicity Public relations Point of purchase display


Perfect development and maintaining of knowledge of organization

promotional initiatives and implementation where appropriate.

251 | P a g e

Packaging Direct mail

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.3: Provide enhanced products and services to clients and customers.

Benefits of enhanced products and services

Improved security

Enhancement of the product capabilities

Boosting of the overall productivity

Cost optimization

Methods for driving maximum benefit from product enhancement

Perform in-depth research of market trends

Emphasize on strategies that lay excessive value

Follow a regimented approach

Innovate and re-engineer

Methods for providing enhanced products and services

Offer better quality to your customers

Increase your delivery speed

o Large group discussion o Individual reflection o Pair work o Small group activity o Presentation by trainer o Experience sharing

- - Reference books - Online materials - Scholarly materials

Content Learning

activities

Resources

252 | P a g e

Provide additional expert advice to your customers

Improve your product’s design and packaging

Add simplicity to every possible customer’s interaction with your company

Improve customer service for your products and services





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Ticking Essay (short responses / extended responses)

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: benefits of enhanced products and services are well identified Improved security Enhancement of the product capabilities Boosting of the overall productivity Cost optimization


Proactive provision of enhanced products and services to clients and

customers based on client information.

253 | P a g e

Indicator: methods for driving maximum benefit from product enhancement are well

identified

Perform in-depth research of market trends Emphasize on strategies that lay excessive value Follow a regimented approach Innovate and re-engineer

Indicator: methods for providing enhanced products and services are identified Offer better quality to your customers Increase your delivery speed Provide additional expert advice to your customers Improve your product’s design and packaging Add simplicity to every possible customer’s interaction with your company Improve customer service for your products and services

Observation

References:

2. Solomon, Micah (4 March 2010). "Seven Keys to Building Customer Loyalty--and Company

Profits"

3. Dall, Michael; Bailine, Adam (2004). Service this: Winning the war against customer disservice

(1st ed.). Last Chapter First. ISBN 0-9753719-0-8.

4. https://www.dalecarnegie.com/events/transforming_customer_complaints_into_opportunities

/

5. https://www.customersure.com/blog/customer-complaints-online/

http://www.fastcompany.com/1570793/seven-keys-building-customer-loyalty-and-company-profits

http://www.fastcompany.com/1570793/seven-keys-building-customer-loyalty-and-company-profits

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Standard_Book_Number

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:BookSources/0-9753719-0-8

https://www.dalecarnegie.com/events/transforming_customer_complaints_into_opportunities/

https://www.dalecarnegie.com/events/transforming_customer_complaints_into_opportunities/

https://www.customersure.com/blog/customer-complaints-online/

254 | P a g e

Competence

G E N A M 4 0 1 - FUNDAMENTAL MATHEMATICAL ANALYSIS

GENAM401 Apply Fundamental Mathematical Analysis


Credits: 10 100

Sector: Agriculture and Food Processing, Construction and Building Services, ICT and Multimedia, Manufacturing and

Mining, Energy, Transport and Logistics, Technical Services

Sub-sector: Animal Health, Crop Production, Food Processing, Forestry, Irrigation and Drainage, Carpentry, Interior

Design, Land surveying, Masonry, Plumbing, Road Construction, Hydropower Energy, Industrial Electricity, Solar Energy, Software Development, Networking, Production Technology, Welding, Multimedia, Electronics, Telecommunication, Auto electricity and Electronic Systems, Auto Mobile Transmission and Control System Technology

Issue date: August, 2019

Purpose statement

This general module describes the knowledge, skills and attitude required to apply fundamental

mathematical analysis. Analysis is at a depth, complexity, and possibly beauty, since under the surface of

everyday mathematics, there is an assurance of correctness, that we call consistency. Thus, from

Analysis, in other fields of academic study, there are sights of a strange land increasingly brought to the

head (forefront) of standard critical thinking. At the end of this module, the trainee of Level Four will be

able to determine and analyze algebraic functions, fundamentals of differentiation, natural logarithmic

and exponential functions. This module will be useful to trainee as a means of both measuring and

improving their understanding of Mathematics and he/she will be equipped to perform well in any fields

that require some knowledge of mathematics as well as working in design, demography, solving real

problems, good performance in critical thinking and so on.

255 | P a g e


Not applicable

Elements of competence and performance criteria

Learning units describe the essential outcomes of a competence.

Performance criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the learning unit.


Elements of competence Performance criteria

1. Determine and analyze algebraic functions

1.1. Accurate determination of the domain and range of algebraic function based on existence condition.

1.2. Adequate identification of symmetry (parity) of algebraic function based on definitions of key words (even and odd).

1.3. Correct determination of limits of a function based on theory of calculating limits.

1.4. Accurate determination of the asymptotes to the rational and irrational functions based on limits calculation.

2. Apply fundamentals of differentiation

2.1. Proper determination of derivative by using definition.

2.2. Adequate interpretation of derivative of a function by illustrating a curve with its tangent and secant line.

2.3. Appropriate application of derivative based on definitions and calculation of derivatives.

2.4. Appropriate graph sketching of an algebraic function from the table of variation of the given function.

3. Apply exponential functions 3.1. Accurate determination of the domain of definition of function based on existence condition.

3.2. Correct calculation of limit of exponential functions based on properties of exponentials.

3.3. Correct differentiation of exponential functions based on definition of derivative.

256 | P a g e

3.4. Appropriate graph sketching of exponential functions according to the table of variation.

4. Apply logarithmic functions

4.1. Proper determination of the domain of logarithmic functions based on existence conditions.

4.2. Proper calculation of limits of logarithmic functions based on logarithmic properties.

4.3. Correct differentiation of logarithmic functions according to differentiation definition.

4.4. Appropriate graph sketching of logarithmic functions based on table of variation.

257 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 1: Determine and analyze algebraic functions

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Determine the domain and range of algebraic function

2. Identify the symmetry of algebraic function

3. Determine limits of a function

4. Determine the asymptotes to the rational and polynomial functions 30 Hours

Learning Outcome 1.1: Determine the domain and range of algebraic function

Definitions Existence

condition Domain of

definition of a function

Range of a function

Calculations Domain of

definition of a function

Range of a function

o Group discussion on existence condition

o Practical exercises on determination of domain and range of a function

o Individual exercises on determination of domain and range of a function

o Documentary Research

- Reference Books - Didactic materials such as

manila paper - Hand-out notes - Internet


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Accurate determination of the domain and range of algebraic function based on

existence condition

258 | P a g e




Written evidence Short questions Open questions Matching

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Definition is well given

Concept of existence condition is given

Concept of domain of definition (all allowed inputs) is given

Concept of range (all possible outcomes) is given

Indicator 2: Calculation is accurately done

Launch of existence condition is given

Determination of domain of definition is done

Determination of range is found

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.2: Identify the symmetry of algebraic function

Even function

Odd function

o Group discussion on

symmetry of algebraic

function

o Pairing work

o Practical exercises o Individual exercises o Documentary Research

- Reference Books - Didactic materials

such as manila paper - Hand-out notes - Internet

Content Learning

activities

Resources

259 | P a g e





Written evidence Short questions based on symmetry of algebraic function Open questions based on symmetry of algebraic function

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Identification of Parameters that influence symmetry

Definition of even function is given

Definition of odd function is given

Identification of even function is done

Identification of odd function is done

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.3: Determine limits of a function

Finite limits

Infinite limits

Limit at infinity

Indeterminate case

0

0

0


calculation of limits

o Pairing work

o Practical exercises on calculation of limits

o Individual exercises on calculation of limits


- Reference Books - Hand-out notes - Didactic materials

such as manila paper - Internet

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Adequate identification of symmetry (parity) of algebraic function based on

definitions of key words (even and odd)

260 | P a g e





Written evidence

Open questions Short questions

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Perfect determination of limit

Finite limits are determined

Infinite limits are determined

Limit at infinity are determined

Indeterminate cases are determined

Indicator1: Good performance in Determination of limit for indeterminate case

0

0

0

Observation


Perfect determination of limits of a function based on theory of calculating limits

261 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.4: Determine the asymptotes to the rational and polynomial

functions

Definitions

Boundaries of

domain of

definition

Horizontal

asymptote

Vertical asymptote

Oblique

asymptote

Calculations

Horizontal

asymptote

Vertical asymptote

Oblique

asymptote

o Pairing work on boundaries of

domain of definition

o Practical exercises on different

types of asymptotes


- Reference Books - Didactic materials

such as manila paper, …

- Hand-out notes - internet





Written evidence

Open questions

Short questions

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Accurate determination of the asymptotes to the rational and irrational

functions based on limits calculation

262 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Definition is well given

Definition of Boundaries of domain of definition is given

Definition of Horizontal asymptote is given

Definition of Vertical asymptote is given

Definition of Oblique asymptote is given

Indicator2: Calculation/ determination of related asymptote is accurately done

Determination of Horizontal asymptote is done

Determination of Vertical asymptote is done

Determination of Oblique asymptote is done

Observation

263 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 2: Apply fundamentals of differentiation

2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Determine derivative of a function 2. Interpret derivative of a function 3. Apply derivative 4. Sketch an accurate curve of a function

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 2.1:Determine derivative of a function

Definition of derivative

Calculation of derivatives Derivative of function at a given

point Derivative of a polynomial

function Derivative of a rational function Derivative of an irrational function Successive derivatives

o Group discussion on derivative of function


- Reference Books - Didactic

materials such as manila paper

- Hand-out notes - internet


Assessor may collect among the following evidences and make judgements on whether the performance criterion has been achieved.


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper determination of derivative from given definition

264 | P a g e

Written evidence

Short questions Open questions all based on definition or determination of derivative

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Definition is given

Definition of derivative is given

Indicator 2: Calculation is well performed

Calculation of derivative of a function at a given point is done

Calculation of derivative of a polynomial function is done

Calculation of derivative of a rational function is done

Calculation of derivative of an irrational function is done

Calculation of successive derivative is done

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.2 : Interpret derivative of a function

Geometric interpretation of a derivative of a function at a point

Kinematical meaning of a derivative

o Group discussion on derivative function


- Reference Books - Geometric

instruments - Didactic materials

such as manila paper

- Hand-out notes - Internet



Content Learning

activities

Resources


Adequate interpretation of derivative of a function by illustrating a curve with its

tangent and secant line

265 | P a g e


Written evidence

Short questions based on interpretation of derivative Open questions based on interpretation of derivative

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Interpretation of derivative is correctly given

Geometric interpretation of a derivative is given

Kinematical meaning of a derivative is given

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.3: Apply derivative

Tangent and normal at a point of a function

Increasing and decreasing function

Maximum and minimum points of a function

Concavity, inflection point on a graph

o Group discussion on differentiation of function

o Practical exercises on different applications of derivative

o Individual exercises on different applications of derivative



instruments - Didactic materials


- Hand-out notes



Content Learning

activities

Resources


Appropriate application of derivative based on definitions and calculation of

derivatives

266 | P a g e


Written evidence

Short questions Open questions

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator : Application of derivative is accuratelydone

Determination of tangent at a point of a function is done

Determination of increasing interval is done

Determination of decreasing interval is done

Calculation of Minimum point of a function is done

Calculation of Maximum point of a function is done

Determination of concavity of a curve is done

Determination of inflexion point on a curve is done

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.4: Sketching graph of a given function

Parameters required Variation table Additional points

Sketching graph Sketching graph of

polynomial function Sketching graph of

rational function Sketching graph of

irrational function

o Group discussion on different types of function

o Practical exercises on sketching graph

o Individual exercises on sketching graph


- Scientific calculator


instruments (Ruler, T-square)

- Didactic materials such as manila paper

- Hand-out notes - Internet


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Accurate sketching graph of an algebraic function from the table of variation of

the given function

267 | P a g e



Written evidence

Short questions based on derivative Open questions based on derivative and table of variation Sketching graph

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Parameters that influence skecthing graph are well established

Construction of table of variation is done

Choice of additional points is done

Indicator 2: Sketching graph is accurately done

Sketching graph of polynomial function is done

Sketching graph of rational function is done

Sketching graph of irrational function is done

Observation

268 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 3: Apply exponential functions

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Determine the domain of exponential functions

2. Calculate limit of exponential functions

3. Differentiate exponential functions

4. Sketch the graph of exponential functions 40 Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1: Determine the domain of exponential functions

Existence conditions

Boundaries

Domain of definition

o Brainstorming domain and range of exponential function

o Group work on determination of domain of definition of exponential function

o Individual work on determination of domain of definition of exponential function


- Reference books - Didactic materials such as

manila paper - Internet - Hand-out notes




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Accurate determination of the domain of definition of function based on

existence condition

269 | P a g e


Written evidence

Short questions related to existence condition Open questions related to determination of domain of

definition of exponential functions.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1: Existence condition is appropriate to the given function

Existence conditions are indicated

Indicator2: Determined domain is appropriate

Determination of boundaries of domain of definition is done

Deduction of domain of definition is done

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.2: Calculate limit of exponential functions

Finite limits

Limits at infinity

Deduction/ calculation of Asymptotes

o Brainstorming on calculating limits

o Documentary Research o Group work on determination

of asymptotes o Individual work on

determination of asymptotes

- Hand-out notes - Reference books - Didactic materials such as

manila paper - Internet





Written evidence Short questions

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Adequate calculation of limit of exponential functions based on properties of

exponentials

270 | P a g e

Open questions

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Limits calculation is perfectly done


Limits at infinity are found

Indicator 2: Deduction/ Calculation of asymptotes is appropriate

Horizontal asymptotes are determined

Vertical asymptotes are determined

Oblique asymptotes are determined

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.3: Differentiate exponentials functions

Differentiation

Increasing and decreasing intervals

Concavity

o Brainstorming differentiation o Group discussion on increasing

and decreasing intervals o Pairing work on concavity o Individual work o Documentary Research

- Hand-out notes - Reference books - Didactic materials


- Internet





Content Learning

activities

Resources


Perfect differentiation of exponential functions based on definition of derivative

271 | P a g e

Written evidence

Short questions related to derivative Open questions related to derivative

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Calculation/determination is well performed

First derivative


Maximum or minimum points

Second derivative

Concavity

Inflection points

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.4: Sketching graph of exponential functions


Sketching graph

o Brainstorming on variation table

o Group discussion on sketching graph

o Individual work on sketching graph


- Hand-out notes - Reference books - Geometric

instruments (Ruler, T-square)


- Internet


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Adequate sketching graph of exponential functions according to the table of

variation

272 | P a g e




Written evidence

Open questions related to table of variation Sketching graph

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Parameters that influence sketching graph are well identified

Presentation of variation table

Selection of additional points

Indicator 2: Sketched graph is well presented

Presentation of asymptotes is done

Plotting the graph is done

Observation

273 | P a g e

Learning unit LU4: Apply logarithmic functions of trigonometry

4

Learning Outcomes:

1. Determine the domain of definition of logarithmic

functions

2. Calculate limits of logarithmic functions

3. Differentiate logarithmic functions

4. Sketching graph of logarithmic functions

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 4.1: Determine the domain of definition of logarithmic functions

Existence conditions

Boundaries

Domain of definition

o Brainstorming on existence condition

o Pairing in determining the boundaries of domain of definition

o Group work on determination of domain of definition

o Individual work on determination of domain of definition

- Hand-out notes - Reference books - Didactic materials such as

manila paper - Internet




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper determination of the domain of logarithmic functions based on existence

conditions

274 | P a g e


Written evidence

Short questions related to existence condition

Open questions related to determination of domain of definition of logarithmic functions.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Existence condition is appropriate to the given function

Determination of existence conditions is given

Indicator 2: Determination of domain is accurate

Determination of boundaries of domain of definition is done

Deduction of domain of definition is done

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.2: Calculate limit of logarithmic functions

Properties of logarithms

Finite limits

Limits at infinity

Deduction of Asymptotes

o Brainstorming on calculation of limits

o Group work in determining asymptotes

o Individual work in determining asymptotes








Content Learning

activities

Resources


Accurate calculation of limit of logarithmic functions based on logarithmic

properties

275 | P a g e

Written evidence

Short questions based on logarithmic properties Open questions related to limits calculation of logarithmic

function

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Calculation is perfectly done


Limits at infinity are identified

Indicator 2: Deduction/ Calculation of asymptotes is appropriately done

Vertical asymptotes are determined

Horizontal asymptotes are determined

Oblique asymptotes are determined

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.3: Differentiate logarithmic functions

Differentiation


Concavity

o Brainstorming on differentiation

o Group discussion on differentiating logarithmic functions

o Individual work on differentiating logarithmic functions

o Pairing work on increasing or decreasing intervals and concavity for logarithmic functions.




Content Learning

activities

Resources

276 | P a g e




Written evidence

Short questions Open questions

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Determination/ calculation is well performed

Calculation of First derivative

Identification of increasing intervals

Identification of decreasing intervals

Determination of maximum points

Determination of minimum points

Calculation of second derivative

Identification of concavity

Determination of inflection points

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.4: Sketching graph of logarithmic functions


Sketching graph

o Brainstorming variation table o Group discussion on how to

choose additional points o Individual exercise on how to

choose additional points

- Hand-out notes - Reference books - Geometric instruments

(Ruler, T-square)

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Perfect differentiation of logarithmic functions according to differentiation

definition

277 | P a g e

o Pairing work on sketching graph



- Internet





Written evidence

Short questions Open questions Graph sketched

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Parameters that influence sketching graph are well identified

Presentation of variation table is done

Selection of additional points is done

Indicator 2: Curve sketched is accurate

Presentation of asymptotes is done

Plotting the graph is done

Observation

Reference books:

1. A. J. Sadler, D. W. S. Thorning (1987). Understanding Pure Mathematics, Oxford University Press.


Accurate sketching graph of logarithmic functions based on table of variation

278 | P a g e

2. Arthur Adam, Freddy Goossens and Francis Lousberg (1991). Mathematisons 65, DeBoeck, 3rd

edition. 3. David Rayner (2000). Higher GCSE Mathematics, Oxford University Press.

4. DPES- RWANDA (1990). Complexes 5th, Livre de l’élève. IMPRISCO-Kigali.

5. Frank Ebos, Dennis Hamaguchi, Barbana Morrison & John Klassen (1990), Mathematics Principles & Process, Nelson Canada A Division of International Thomson Limited.

6. George B. Thomas, Maurice D. Weir & Joel R. Hass (2010), Thomas’ Calculus Twelfth Edition, Pearson Education.

7. J CRAWSHAW, J CHAMBERS (1984). A concise course in A-Level statistics with worked examples, Stanley Thornes (Publishers) LTD.

8. Ngezahayo, E. P. (2017). Advanced Mathematics for Rwanda Secondary Schools. Learners’ Book Senior Six. Kigali: Fountain.

9. Ngezahayo, E. P. (2017). Advanced Mathematics for Rwanda Secondary Schools. Learners’ Book Senior Five. Kigali: Fountain.

10. Ngezahayo, E. P. (2016). Advanced Mathematics for Rwanda Secondary Schools. Learners’ Book Senior Four. Kigali: Fountain.

11. Peter Smythe (2005). Mathematics HL & SL with HL options, Revised Edition, Mathematics Publishing Pty. Limited.

12. Shampiona, A. (2005). Mathématiques 6. Kigali: Rwanda Education Board

279 | P a g e

Competence

P H Y M P 4 0 1 - MECHANICS AND PROPERTIES OF MATTER

PHYMP401 APPLY MECHANICS AND PROPERTIES OF MATTER

RTQF Level: 4 Learning hours

Credits: 4 40

Sector: Construction and building services, Agriculture and food processing, Art and craft,

Manufacturing and mining, Transport and logistics, ICT, Energy, Technical services, Media and Farm

Making.

Sub-sector: Carpentry, Masonry, Plumbing, Road construction, Interior design, Land surveying,

Animal health, Food processing, Irrigation, Agrimechanization, Graphic art, Production

Technology, Welding, Mining, Auto-Electricity and Electronics systems, Auto-Transmission

System Technology, Software Programming, Networking, Software development,

Renewable energy, Industrial electricity, Solar energy, Hydropower energy,

Electronic services, Telecommunication, Multimedia.


Purpose statement

The current module describes skills, knowledge and attitudes required apply concepts of mechanics and

properties of matter. At the end of the module the trainee should be able to apply static equilibrium and

elasticity, thermodynamics, analyze fluid mechanics, describe laws of motion and their applications,

describe optical instrument and examine effects of electric current flow in dc electric circuit.

It will help trainee to carry out his/her specialized tasks that are useful in analyzing data, solving real life

problems encountered in related fields. In a nutshell, the features depicted on above helps trainees

identify the essential steps in solving problems and increases their skills as problem solvers.

.

280 | P a g e


Not applicable



Performance criteria describe the required performance needed to demonstrate achievement of the learning unit.



1. Describe laws of motion and their

applications

1.1 Clear interpretation of the concept of force based on types of forces

1.2 Clear interpretation of Newton’s laws of motion

1.3 Correct application of Newton’s laws based on the free body diagram

2. Apply static equilibrium and

elasticity

2.1 Correct application of the conditions of equilibrium for rigid bodies

2.2 Clear description of examples of rigid objects in static equilibrium

2.3 Proper application of elastic properties of solids

3. Analyze fluid mechanics

3.1 Correct description of pressure and its variation with depth

3.2 Proper application of Archimedes’ principle- based on Buoyant forces

3.3 Effective analysis of fluid dynamics based on Model of ideal fluid flow

4. Apply thermodynamics 4.1 Clear description of the measurement of temperature of a body according to zeroth law of thermodynamics.

4.2 Effective application of heat measurement, transfer and effects on a body in line with thermal properties of matter

4.3 Effective application of gas laws based on physical properties of gases

4.4 Effective application of thermodynamic processes on a system in line with thermodynamics laws

5.1 Proper description of a simple electric circuit based on Ohm’s law.

281 | P a g e

5. Examine effects of electric

current flow in DC electric circuit

5.2 Analytical determination of electric current, resistances and voltages in DC electric circuits based on Kirchhoff’s laws.

5.3 Correct determination of electric energy, work and power in DC electric circuit in accordance with the law of conservation of energy.

6. Apply Geometric instruments 6.1 Effective description optical instruments based on its corresponding types

6.2 Correct determination of magnification of optical instrument in use

6.3 Effective correction of optical aberrations based on the type of aberration

282 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 1: Describe laws of motion and their applications

1

Learning Outcomes:

1.1 Interpret the concept of the force

1.2 Interpret Newton laws

1.3 Apply Newton's laws

5Hours

Learning Outcome 1.1: Describe the concept of the force

Contact force and field forces Definition of force and

its relation in motion

Contact force & field

force

Examples of contact

and field forces

Fundamental forces and their characteristics

Definition of

fundamental

forces

Four fundamental

forces

Characteristics of

fundamental

forces

Internal & external forces

Definition of

internal force

o In small groups, discuss the relationship between motion and its cause

o Group discussion on the examples of contact forces & field forces

o Discussion on the four fundamental forces and their characteristics

o Group discussion on the internal and external forces on a system


- White board and markers

- Chalkboard and chalks

- Computer

- Projector

- PhET simulations


283 | P a g e

Define external

force

Examples of

internal &

external forces





Written evidence

- Matching questions

- Multiple choice questions

- True or False questions

- Essay

- Problem solving

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Contact force and field forces are well described

Force and its relation in motion is described

Contact & field forces are distinguished

Some examples of contact and field forces are identified

Indicator 2: Fundamental forces are well described

Types of fundamental forces are identified

Fundamental forces are characterized

Indicator 3: Internal & external forces are well differentiated

Internal forces are defined

External are defined

Observation


Clear interpretation of the concept of force based on types of forces

284 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.2: Interpret Newton’s laws

First law of Newton First law statement

Motion at constant

velocity

Bodies at rest

Second of Newton Second law statement

Net external forces and

Vectors

Mathematical expression

of the second law

Third law of Newton Third law statement

Defining a System

Action and Reaction pairs

on a system

o Brainstorming on the principle of inertia

o Discussion on the equilibrium at rest and constant velocity

o Discussion on application of second law statement

o Group discussion on the net external forces and vectors

o Group work on using the mathematical expression of the second law

o Group discussion on application of Third law statement

o Group discussion on the action and reaction pairs


- White board and

markers

- chalkboard and

chalks

- Computer

- Projector

- PhET simulator





Written evidence




- Essay questions

Task: Perform an experimental work on Newtown law



Clear interpretation of Newton’s laws of motion

285 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: First Law of Newton is well interpreted

First law is stated

Inertia is defined

Equilibrium at constant velocity is interpreted

Equilibrium at rest is interpreted

Indicator 2: Second Law of Newton is well interpret

Second law is stated

Net external forces are defined

Mathematical expression of the second law is used

Indicator 3: Third Law of Newton is well interpret

Third law is stated

System of interest is defined

Action and reaction pairs on a system are defined

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.3: Apply Newton's laws

Motion on a plane static friction

dynamic friction

Free body diagram on a

plane

Motion of suspended

object Weight of suspended

object

Tension forces

Free body diagram on

suspended objects

Rocket motion Thrust

Air resistance

Free body diagram on a

rocket

o Individually, perform Experimental demonstration on the static friction and dynamic friction

o Group discussion about simulation on types of friction

o Group work on solving problems related to the plane

o Group work on solving problems related to the on suspended object

o Group work on solving problems related to the rocket motion

- White board and

markers

- chalkboard and chalks


- Computer

- Projector

- PhET simulations


286 | P a g e





Written evidence - Matching questions



- Essay question

- Problem solving

Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Motion on a plane is well described

Static friction is defined

Kinetic friction is defined

Free body diagram on a plane is illustrated

Indicator 2: Motion of suspended object is well described

Weight is defined

Tension forces are described

Free body diagram is illustrated

Problems on a suspended objects are solved

Indicator 3: Rocket motion is well interpreted

Thrust is defined

Air resistance is defined

Free body diagram is well illustrated

Problems on a rocket motion are solved

Observation


Correct application of Newton’s laws based on the free body

diagram

287 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 2.1: Apply conditions of static equilibrium

Moment of the force

Definition of moment of force

Torque associated with the force

Rotational equilibrium and static

equilibrium

Necessary conditions for equilibrium

of an object

First condition for equilibrium

Second condition for equilibrium

Centre of gravity

Definition of centre of gravity

Determination of centre of gravity

o Brainstorming on

moment of force

o Brainstorming on:

Torque associated with

the force

Rotational equilibrium

and static equilibrium

o In groups, trainee

discuss on equilibrium condition

- Whiteboard and

markers

- Chalkboard and

chalks

- Computer

- Projector - Textbooks - PhET simulations

Learning unit

LU 2: Apply static equilibrium and elasticity

2

Learning Outcomes:

2.1 Apply conditions of static equilibrium 2.2 Describe examples of rigid objects in static equilibrium 2.3 Apply elastic properties of solids 5 Hours


288 | P a g e

o Individually, trainee

determine centre of

gravity





- Written evidence

- Performance evidence



- Essay questions

Task: Measure the torque associated with the force.

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Moment of the force are well described

Moment of force is described

Torque associated with the force is described

Rotational equilibrium and static equilibrium is described

Indicator 2: Necessary conditions for equilibrium of an object are well described

First condition for equilibrium is described

Second condition for equilibrium is described

Indicator 3: Centre of gravity is well determined

Centre of gravity is defined

Centre of gravity is determined.

Observation


Correct application of the conditions of static equilibrium for rigid bodies

289 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 2.2: Describe examples of rigid objects in static equilibrium

The seesaw revisited

Determine magnitude of

the upward force

Determination of balancing

system

A weighted hand Upward force Downward force

Standing on a horizontal beam Determination of horizontal

and vertical components Applying conditions for

equilibrium in solving problems

The leaning ladder A uniform ladder at rest The free body diagram for

the ladder Applying conditions for the

equilibrium to the ladder.

o In groups, trainees discuss on: Determination of magnitude

of the upward force

Determination of balancing

system

o Individually, a trainee performs calculations on:

Upward force

Downward force

Horizontal and vertical

components applying

conditions for equilibrium in

solving problems

o In small groups, trainees discuss on: The free body diagram for

the ladder Techniques of applying

conditions for the equilibrium to the ladder.

- Whiteboard and

markers

- Chalkboard and

chalks

- Computer

- Projector

- Textbooks






- Written evidence




- Essay questions



Proper description on examples of rigid objects in static equilibrium

290 | P a g e

Task: Perform experiment on rigid objects in static

equilibrium

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: The seesaw revisited are well described

Magnitude of the upward is determined

Balancing systems are explained

Indicator 2: A weighted hand is well described

Upward force is determined.

Downward force is determined.

Indicator 3: Standing on a horizontal beam is well described

Horizontal and vertical components are determined

Conditions for equilibrium in solving problems are applied

Indicator 4: The leaning ladder is well described

A uniform ladder at rest is described

The free body diagram for the ladder is described

Conditions for the equilibrium to the ladder are applied

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.3: Apply elastic properties of solids

Deformation of solids in terms of the concepts of stress and strain Definition of stress and

strain Relation between stress

and strain Elastic modulus

Three types of deformation and elastic modulus for each Young’s modulus

(elasticity in length)

o In small groups, trainees

discuss on the deformation of

solids in terms of stress and

strain.

o Individually, a trainee

performs calculations on:

Young’s modulus (elasticity in

length)

Shear modulus (elasticity of

shape)

- Flipchart

- Markers

- Pen

- Reference books

- PhET simulations of

balancing system and

young’s modulus.


291 | P a g e

Shear modulus

(elasticity of shape)

Bulk modulus (Volume

elasticity)

Stress versus strain

curve for an elastic

solid.

Bulk modulus (Volume

elasticity)

o Individually, a trainee

illustrates elastic behavior,

elastic limit and breaking

point on the curve.





- Written evidence



- Essay questions

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Deformation of solids in terms of the concepts of stress and strain is well discussed

Stress and strain are defined

Stress and strain are related

Elastic modulus is described

Indicator 2: Three types of deformation and elastic modulus for each are well described

Young’s modulus(elasticity in length) is described

Shear modulus(elasticity of shape) is described

Bulk modulus(Volume elasticity) is described

Stress versus strain curve for an elastic solid is described

Observation


Proper application of elastic properties of solids

292 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.1: Describe pressure and its variation with depth

● Pressure Pressure in a fluid

Force and pressure

A simple device for measuring the

pressure exerted by a fluid

Variation of pressure with depth Variation of atmospheric pressure

against altitude

Water pressure against depth

Pascal’s principle

● Pressure measurements Measurements of atmospheric

pressure Barometric pressure

Absolute pressure and gauge

pressure

o Discussion in small groups, on concepts of force and pressure

o In small groups, discuss on the variation of pressure with the depth

o Individually, state the pascal’s principle

o Individually, explain the measurements of pressure.

- Whiteboard and

markers

- Chalkboard and

chalks

- Search engine - Textbooks

- Simulation

software (PhET)

- Computer

- projector


Learning unit LU 3: Analyze fluid mechanics

3

Learning Outcomes:

3.1 Describe pressure and its variation with depth 3.2 Apply Archimedes’ principle 3.3 Analyze fluid dynamics

10 Hours


293 | P a g e



- Written evidence - Performance evidence

- Matching type questions



- Essay questions

Task: Measurement of pressures

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Pressure is well described

Pressure in a fluid is described

Force and pressure are described

A simple device for measuring the pressure exerted by a fluid is described

Indicator 2: Variation of pressure with depth is well explained

Variation of atmospheric pressure against altitude is explained

Water pressure against depth is described

Pascal’s principle is explained

Indicator 3: Pressure measurements is well described

Measurements of atmospheric pressure is defined

Barometric pressure is described

Absolute pressure and gauge pressure is described

Observation


Correct description of pressure and its variation with depth

294 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.2 : Apply Archimedes’ principle

Buoyant forces Meaning of Buoyant force

Relationship between

magnitude of buoyant force and

weight of the fluid displaced.

● Archimedes’s principle

Stating Archimedes ’principle

Practical inventions of

Archimedes ’principle

Archimedes’s principle on totally

submerged object

Archimedes’ principle on

floating object

o Individually, explain the meaning of Buoyant force.

o Individually, demonstrate the relationship between magnitude of Buoyant force and weight of the fluid displaced.

o In small groups, discuss on practical inventions of Archimedes’ principle

o In small groups, trainees discuss on Archimedes’ principle on totally submerged and floating object.

- Whiteboard and

markers

- Chalkboard and

chalks


- Simulation

software (PhET)

- Computer

- projector








- Essay questions

Task: Perform experiment on Buoyant force and Archimedes’ Principles



Proper application of Archimedes’ principle- based on Buoyant forces

295 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Buoyant forces is well described

Buoyant force is defined

Relationship between magnitude of buoyant force and weight of the fluid

displaced is described.

Indicator2: Archimedes’s principle is well described

Archimedes ‘principle is described

Archimedes’s principle on totally submerged object is described

Archimedes’ principle on floating object is described

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.3: Analyze fluid dynamics

viscosity

Definition of viscosity

Four assumptions of Model

of ideal fluid flow

Equation of continuity for

fluids

Bernoulli’s principle and its

application

Stating Bernoulli’s principle

Bernoulli’s equation as

applied to an ideal fluid

Application of Bernoulli’s

principle

Other applications of fluid

dynamics

Streamline flow around a

moving airplane wing

Newton’s third law about the

airstream.

o In small groups, discuss on the four assumptions of model of ideal fluid flow

o In small groups, trainees discuss on Bernoulli’s principle and its application.

o Individually, state Bernoulli’s principle and explain Bernoulli’s equations applied to an ideal fluid.

o Individually, explain with the help of illustration how streamline flow around a moving airplane behaves.

- Whiteboard and

markers

- Chalkboard and

chalks


- Simulation

software (PhET)

- Computer

- projector


296 | P a g e




- Written evidence

-




- Essay questions

- Problem solving

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: viscosity is well described

viscosity is defined

Four assumptions of Model of ideal fluid flow are described

Equation of continuity for fluid is determined

Indicator 2: Bernoulli’s principle and its application are described

Bernoulli’s principle is stated

Bernoulli’s equation as applied to an ideal fluid is described

Application of Bernoulli’s principle are described

Indicator 3: Other applications of fluid dynamics are well described

Streamline flow around a moving airplane wing is explained

Newton’s third law about the airstream is explained

Observation


Effective analysis of fluid dynamics based on Model of ideal fluid flow

297 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 4: Apply thermodynamics

4

Learning Outcomes:

4.1 Describe the measurement of temperature of a bod

4.2 Apply heat measurement, transfer and effects on a body

4.3 Apply gas laws

4.4 Apply thermodynamic processes on a system 5 Hours

Learning Outcome 4.1: Describe measurement of temperature of a body

Key terms Heat

Temperature

Internal energy

Zeroth law of

thermodynamics

Temperature measurement Liquid-in-glass

thermometer

Digital thermometer

Thermocouple

Infrared thermometer

Calibration of

thermometers

measuring a body’s

temperature

o Brainstorming on key terms

o Group discussion on measuring temperature using thermometers

o Group discussion on Conversion of thermometric scales

o Group discussion on calibration of Thermometers

o Individually work to solve measurements of temperature

- Thermometers

- Pictures

- Computer

- White board and

markers

- Chalkboard and chalk

- Projector


298 | P a g e

Conversion of temperature scales (Celsius, Kelvin, and Fahrenheit)



performance criterion has been achieved


- Written evidence





- Essay (Short responses)

- Problem solving on measuring temperature

- Observation checklist for experiments

Task: Measure effectively the temperature of a body

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Key terms are well explained

Heat and temperature are differentiated

Internal energy is defined

Zeroth law of thermodynamics is stated

Indicator 2: Temperature is well measured

Thermometer is used

Thermometer is calibrated

Measurement is taken and recorded

Indicator 3: Conversion of temperature scales is well done

Celsius and Kelvin are interconverted

Celsius and Fahrenheit are interconverted


Clear description of the measurement of temperature of a body

according to zeroth law of thermodynamics.

299 | P a g e

Fahrenheit and Kelvin are interconverted

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.2: Apply heat measurement, transfer and effects on a body

Thermal properties of matter Thermal conductivity

Thermal diffusivity

Specific heat

Melting point

Boiling point

Heat quantities Heat lost or gain due

temperature change

Principle of heat

exchange

Mixtures

Measurement of

specific heat

capacity

Latent heat

Transition of

physical states

Heat of fusion

Heat of

vaporization

Heat of

sublimation

Thermal equilibrium

Modes of heat transfer Conduction

Fourrier’s law

coefficient of

thermal

conductivity

Thermal

resistance

conductors and

insulators

o Group discussion on heat measurement

o Case study on modes of heat transfer

o Group discussion on heat effects

o Individually work to solve problems related to heat measurement

o Individual work to Solve problems related to heat transfer

o Individually work to solve problems related to heat effects

o Individual work/ research on the application of heat measurement, heat transfer and heat effects

- Simulation software on

heat measurements

- Calorimeters

- Thermometers

- Hand out notes

- Video on heat transfer

- Computer

- White board and

markers


- Projector

- Simulation software on

heat measurements

- Calorimeters

- Thermometers

- Hand out notes

- Video on heat transfer

- Computer

- White board and

markers


projector

Content Learning

activities

Resources

300 | P a g e

Convection

Convection

currents

Newton’s law of

cooling

Theory on the

formation of wind

Thermal Radiation

Emmissivity

View factor

Blackbody

Stefan – Boltzman

law

Heat effects Chemical effects

Change of Physical

state

Expansion and

contraction

Linear expansion

Areal expansion

Volume expansion





- Written evidence






- Problem solving on heat measurement, transfer and effects



Effective application of heat measurement, transfer and effects on

a body in line with thermal properties of matter

301 | P a g e

Task 1: Perform experiment on heat transfer for a cooking pan

2 : Experiment on thermal expansion or contraction of a body

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Thermal properties of matter are well described

Melting point is described

Boiling point is described

Specific heat capacity is described

Thermal diffusivity is described

Thermal conductivity is described

Indicator 2: Heat quantity is well determined

Change in heat is measured

Latent heat is measured

Change of states is described

Pressure or impurities in body are considered

Principle of heat exchange is applied

Specific heat capacity of a body is determined

Indicator 3: Law of heat conduction is well applied

Heat conduction is explained

Coefficient of thermal conductivity is determined

Insulators and conductors are differentiated

Conduction equation is applied

Fourier’s law of conduction is applied

Indicator 4: Law of heat convection is well applied

Heat convection is explained

Convection currents are explained

Newton’s law of cooling is applied

Temperature is determined

Indicator 5: Law of thermal radiation is applied

Thermal radiation is explained

Poor emitters and good emitters are differentiated

Stefan-Boltzmann law is applied in problem solving

Blackbody radiation is explained

Radiative heat is determined

Indicator 6: Thermal expansion of body is applied

Equation of linear expansion is applied

length is determined

Equation of areal expansion is applied

Area is determined

Equation of volume expansion is applied

302 | P a g e

Volume is determined

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.3: Apply gas laws

Physical properties of gases density

shape

Volume

Temperature

Pressure

Force and energy of a gas system

Intermolecular force Molecular Kinetic

energy

Gas laws Boyle-Marriott law

Charles’s law

Gay-Lussac law Equation of State of an

ideal gas

o Brainstorming on Physical properties of gases

o Group discussion and presentation on forces and energy in a gas system

o Case study on Gas laws

o Group discussion on equation of state of an ideal gas

o Practice on application of gas laws

- Computer

- White board and

markers


Projector





- Written evidence


- Multiple questions




Effective application of gas laws based on physical properties of

gases

303 | P a g e


- Problem solving on gas laws

Task: Perform experiment on state of matter using kinetic theory of gases

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Physical properties of gases are explained

Density is explained

Shape is described

Volume is described

Pressure is recalled

Temperature is recalled

Indicator 2:Force and energy of a gas system are well described

Intermolecular forces are explained

Molecular Kinetic energy is described

Indicator 3: Gas laws are well applied

Boyle-Marriott law is applied

Volume or pressure is determined

Charles’ law is applied

Volume or Temperature is determined

Gay-Lussac law is applied

Pressure or Temperature is determined

Equation of State of an ideal gas is applied

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.4: Apply thermodynamic processes on a system

Key Concepts Thermodynamics

Thermodynamic system

Isolated system

Closed system

open system

Surroundings

Boundary

o Brainstorming on key concepts

o Discussion on zeroth law of thermodynamics

- Video on

thermodynamics laws

- Computer

- White board and

markers


Content Learning

activities

Resources

304 | P a g e

First law of thermodynamics Internal energy

Heat exchange

Work done by/on a system

Thermodynamic processes Adiabatic

Isothermal

Isobaric

Isochoric

Second law of thermodynamics Thermodynamic cycles

Carnot

Rankine

Diesel

Otto

Application of

thermodynamic cycles

Heat engines (working

principle, efficiency)

Refrigerators

Heat pumps

o Group work for interpretation of first law of thermodynamics

o Group discussion on thermodynamic processes (Adiabatic, isothermal and isochoric) basing first law

o Case study on second law of thermodynamics

o Individually work to solve Problems related to the thermodynamics laws

o Interpretation of thermodynamic cycles using computer simulations

Projector





Written evidence Performance evidence






Effective application of thermodynamic processes on a system in

line with thermodynamics laws

305 | P a g e

- Problem solving on thermodynamics laws

Task: Install the cooling system of computers

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator1 : Key terms are well explained

Thermodynamics is defined

system is described

types of systems (open, close, isolated) are differentiated

Surroundings are defined

Boundary is defined

Indicator 2: Thermodynamics 1st law is well applied

Internal energy is explained

Heat exchange is explained

Work done by or on the system is described

1st law of thermodynamics is stated

1st law of thermodynamics is applied in problem solving

Thermodynamic processes (adiabatic, isothermal, isobaric, and isochoric) are differentiated

Change in internal energy, work done or heat is determined

Indicator 3: Thermodynamics 2nd law is well applied

Second law of thermodynamics is stated

Thermodynamic cycles (Carnot, Diesel, Otto, and Rankine) are differentiated

Second law of thermodynamics is applied in problem solving

Efficiency of heat engine is determined

Coefficient of performance of heat pump and refrigerator is determined

Observation

306 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 5: Examine current flow effects in DC electric circuit

5

Learning Outcomes:

5.1 Describe a simple electric circuit. 5.2 Determine electric current, resistances and voltages in DC

electric circuits. 5.3 Determine electric energy, work and power in DC electric

circuit.

5Hours

Learning Outcome 5.1: Describe a simple electric circuit.

Simple DC electric circuit Definition

Elements of a simple

DC electric circuit

Electric current

Electrical resistance

Voltage

Measuring instruments used in a simple DC electric circuit Ammeter

Voltmeter

Ohmmeter

Multimeter

Combination of resistors Series

Parallel

Mixed

Ohm’s law Statement

V-I characteristics of

a resistor

o Group work for Illustration of a simple DC electric circuit

o Experimental demonstration of connecting a DC electric circuit

o Laboratory work on measurement of electric current, resistance and voltage.

o Laboratory work on experimental verification of Ohm’s law

o Individual work of problem solving on combination of resistors

o Group work of problem solving on combination of cells

- Cell

- Battery

- Solar panel

- Connecting Wires

- Ammeter

- Ohmmeter

- Voltmeter

- Multi-meter

- Electrical lamps

- Graph paper

- Image of DC electric

circuit

- White/chalk board

- Marker pen /chalk

- Scientific calculators


307 | P a g e

Ohmic

conductors

Non-Ohmic

conductors

Electric cells E.M.F(Electromotive

force) of a cell

Internal resistance

Cells network

Cells in series

Cells in parallel

- Ltspice software

- Matlab-Simulink

software

- Computer

- Projector





- Written evidence





- Essay questions

- Problem solving


Task: construct mixed resistances circuits

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: A simple DC circuit is well described and connected

Simple DC electric circuit is defined

Elements of a simple DC circuit are described

A simple DC electric circuit is connected

Electric current is defined

Resistance is define

Voltage is defined

Indicator 2: Measuring instruments are well used in a simple DC circuit

Ammeter is connected


Proper description of a simple electric circuit based on Ohm’s law.

308 | P a g e

Voltmeter is connected

Ohmmeter is connected

Multi-meter is connected

Indicator 3: Resistance network is well described

Series network is described

Parallel network is described

Mixture network is described

Indicator 4: Ohm’s law is well described

Ohm’s law is stated

Ohm’s law is verified

Voltage-Current (V-I) characteristics of a conductor are illustrated

Ohmic conductor is characterized

Non-ohmic conductor is characterized

Indicator 5: Electric cells are well explained

Electromotive force of a cell is well explained

Internal resistance of a cell is well explained

Cells in series are well explained

Cells in parallel are well explained

Observation

Learning Outcome 5.2: Determine electric current, resistances and voltages in DC electric circuits.

● Key concepts Path, junction, branch

Voltage supply

Voltage drop

Voltage gain

● Kirchhoff’s laws Conservation of

charges

Current law

Voltage law

● Circuit analysis using Kirchhoff’s laws Circuit loop

o Group discussion and presentation on key concepts

o Group work for interpretation of Kirchhoff’s laws

o Individual work on determination of branch currents and branch voltages

o Homework on circuit analysis using Kirchhoff laws

Group work on determination of reduced resistance

-White /chalk board

- Marker pen /chalk


- Ltspice software

- Matlab-simulink software

- Computer

o Projector


309 | P a g e

Mesh-current

method

Branch currents

Branch voltage

Reduced resistance









- Essay questions

- Problem solving

Task: Measure voltage, current and resistance in DC electric

circuits

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Key concepts are described

The path in a circuit is well described

The junction in a circuit is we described

Voltage supply is described

Voltage drop is described

Voltage is described

Indicator2: Kirchhoff laws are well described

Charge conservation is interpreted

Current law is described

Voltage law is described

Indicator 3 : Kirchhoff laws are correctly applied

Current law is applied

Branch current is determined


Analytical determination of electric current, resistances and voltages in DC electric circuits based on Kirchhoff’s laws.

310 | P a g e

Mesh-current method is application

Voltage law is applied

Branch voltage is determined

Reduced resistance is determined

Observation

Learning Outcome 5.3 Determine electric energy, work and power in DC electric circuit.

● Law of conservation of energy Definition of electric

energy

Definition of electric

power

Statement of the law

of conservation of

energy

● Calculations of energy and power in DC electric circuit Electrical energy

Electrical power

● Effects associated with electric current in a circuit Joule’s effect

Chemical effect

Magnetic effect

o Group discussion and presentation about law of energy conservation in a circuit

o Individual work on problem solving about electrical energy and power in a circuit

o Group work on problem solving about Joule’s effect in a circuit

o Interpretation of effects of electric current using computer-simulated tools

- software (PhET)

- White/chalk board

- Marker pen/chalk


- Computer

o Projector


311 | P a g e









- Essay questions

- Problem solving

Task: Measure energy and power in electrical circuit

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Law of energy conservation in a circuit is well explained

Electrical energy is well defined

Electrical power is well defined

Law of energy conservation is clearly stated

Indicator 2: Electrical energy and power in a circuit are well computed

Electrical energy is well determined

Electrical power is well determined

Indicator 3: Effects of Electrical current in a circuit are well described

Joule’s effect is described

Energy dissipation is calculated

Chemical effect are described

Magnetic effect is described

Observation

Correct determination of electric energy, work and power in DC electric circuit in accordance with the law of conservation of energy.

312 | P a g e

Learning unit LU 6: Apply Geometric instruments

6

Learning Outcomes:

6.1 Describe types of optical instruments

6.2 Determine magnification of optical instruments

6.3 Describe optical aberrations

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 6.1 Describe types of optical instruments

Single lens optical instruments Human eye

Magnifying glass

Single lens camera

Multi-lens optical

instruments

Telescope

Astronomical

telescope

Telesteria

telescope

Projector

o Discussion on cardinal points

o Group discussion on eye axis

o Brainstorming on the accommodations and resolutions

o Discussions on image

formation in human eye, single lens, camera magnifying glass, telescope, microscope, and projector.

o Simulation of image formation in optical instruments

o Observation of images in the magnifying glass, telescope, microscope, camera and projector.

- Whiteboard and markers



- Magnifying glass

- Camera

- Simulation software

(PhET) on optical

instruments

- Telescope

- Microscope

- Digital Camera

- Computer

- projector



313 | P a g e




- Written evidence - Multiple choice questions


- Essay questions

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Single lens optical instruments are well described

Human eye is described

Magnifying glass is described

Single lens camera is described

Indicator 2: Multi-lens optical instruments are well described

Telescope is described

Projector is described

Observation

Learning Outcome 6.2: Determine the magnification of optical instruments

Magnification of microscope

Magnification of

microscope in normal

adjustment

Magnification of

microscope not in normal

adjustment

Magnification of telescope

o Discussion on key terms

o Group discussion on magnification power

o Simulation of image formation

o Group discussion on magnification power of a telescope

- Whiteboard and

markers



- Magnifying glass


(PhET) on optical

instruments



Effective description optical instruments based on its corresponding types

314 | P a g e


in normal adjustment


not in normal adjustment

Use of optical instruments

Use of microscope

Use of telescope

o Brainstorming on resolving power.

o Individual Problem solving

related to optical instruments

o In small groups, discuss on the

use of microscope and

telescope.

- Telescope

- Microscope

- Digital Camera

- Computer

- projector





Written evidence




- Essay questions

Task: Perform an experimental work on measurement

using

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator 1: Magnification of microscope is well determined

Magnification of microscope in normal is determined

Magnification of microscope not in normal adjustment is determined

Indicator 2: Magnification of telescope is well described

Magnification of telescope in normal adjustment is determined

Magnification of telescope not in normal adjustment is determined

Indicator3: Use of Optical instruments are well described

Use of microscope is described

Use of telescope is described

Observation


Correct determination of magnification of optical instrument in use

315 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 6.3: Correct optical aberrations

Spherical aberration

Character

Correction

● Chromatic aberrations

Character

Correction

Astigmatic aberration

Character

Correction

o Group discussion on character and correction of spherical aberration

o Group discussion on the character and correction of chromatic aberration

o Group discussion on the character and correction of astigmatic aberration.

- Whiteboard and

markers




(PhET) on optical

instruments

- Computer

- projector





- Written evidence - Multiple choice questions


- Essay questions



Effective correction of optical aberrations based on the type of aberration

316 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Spherical aberrations are well described

Character is defined

Correction is determined

Indicator: Chromatic aberrations are well described



Indicator: Astigmatic aberrations are well described



Observation

References:

- Young, Hugh, D.; Freedman, Roger, A. (2012), Sears and Zeanmansky’s University Physics: With

modern physics, 13th edition. New York: Addison Wesley, Pearson

- Arthur Beiser (2009) Schaum's Outline of Applied Physics 4th edition. New York: McGraw-Hill

Companies, Inc

- Giancoli, Douglas C. (2005). Physics Principles with applications 6th edition. Pearson Prentice Hall.

New Jersey.

- Meriam, James, L.; Kraige, L. G. (2012). Engineering Mechanics7th edition. John Wiley and Sons. Inc

- Bansal, Rajeev (2006), Fundamentals of Engineering Electromagnetics. CRC Press

- Halpen, Alvin (2009) Schaum's Outline of Beginning Physics II: Waves, electromagnetism, optics and

modern Physics. New York: McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc.

- Milton, Gussow (2009) Schaum's Outline of basic electricity 2nd Edition. New York: McGraw-Hill

Companies, Inc.

- Nathan, Ida (2015). Engineering Electromagnetics 3rd Edition. Springer International Publishing

Switzerland

- Purcell, Edward (2011). Electricity and Magnetism 2nd Edition. Cambridge University Press

- Salazar, Félix B.; Rafael Medina F.; Bayón Ana R.; Gascón Francisco L. (2016). Solved Problems in

Electromagnetics. Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg

- Sameir M.; Ali, Hamed (2017). Electromagnetics for Engineering Students. Bentham Science

Publishers

- Sharma, K., K. (2006). Optics: Principles and applications. New York: Elsevier

317 | P a g e

- BIPM. (2020), Measurement units. Retrieved from https://www.bipm.org/utils/common/pdf/si-

brochure/SI-Brochure-9.pdf [PDF format]

- Irvin Granet; Maurice Bluestein, (2014), Thermodynamics and Heat Power8th edition, CRC Press,

Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

- Morin, David (2008). Introduction to Classical Mechanics. Cambridge University Press.

- Potter, Merle, c., Wiggert, David, C. (2008). Schaum's Outline of Fluid Physics. New York: McGraw-

Hill Companies, Inc

- Shukla R.K. ; Srivastava, Anchal, (2006). Mechanics. New Age International Pvt. Ltd., Publishers.

- Walter Benenson. Harris John, W. Horst Stocker, Holger Lutz (2002). Handbook of Physics. Springer-

Verlag New York

- Young Hugh D., and Freedman Roger A., (2012), Sears and Zeanmansky’s University Physics: With

modern physics, 13thedition, New York. Addison Wesley, Pears

https://www.bipm.org/utils/common/pdf/si-brochure/SI-Brochure-9.pdf

https://www.bipm.org/utils/common/pdf/si-brochure/SI-Brochure-9.pdf

318 | P a g e

N E W N F 4 0 1 - NETWORK FUNDAMENTALS

NEWNF401 Apply network fundamentals


Credits: 80 80

Sector: ICT



Purpose statement

This core module describes the skills, knowledge and attitude required to describe the purpose and

functions of various network devices and protocols. The learner will be able to select the components

required to meet a network specification, Use the OSI and TCP/IP models and their associated protocols

to explain how data flows in a network, describe the purpose and basic operation of the protocols in the

OSI and TCP models, the components required for network and Internet communications, differentiate

LAN/WAN operation and features.

Explain the technology and media access control method for Ethernet networks, network segmentation

and basic traffic management concepts, implement an IP addressing scheme and IP Services to meet

network requirements in a medium-size Enterprise branch office network, describe the operation and

benefits of using private and public IP addressing. At the end the learner will have a strong

foundation and an understanding of basic network functions, standards, and protocols.

319 | P a g e


Not applicable







1. Introduce Network Concepts 1.1. Proper description of Network concepts and

technologies

1.2. Proper description of Network topology

1.3. Adequate study of network devices, components

and their functions

2. Apply network protocols and

communications

1.1. Correct description of Network Protocols

1.2. Appropriate description of Network standards

1.3. Appropriate identification and application of

Network media

3. Apply IP addressing( IP v4&IPv6) 3.1. Correct description of IP addressing concepts

3.2. Convenient application of IPv4 ( Internet protocol

version 4)

3.3. Convenient application of IPv6 ( Internet protocol

version 6)

320 | P a g e

Learning Unit

LU1: Introduce Network Concepts

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Describe Network concepts and technologies 2. Describe Network topology 3. Study network devices, components and their functions

30 Hours

Learning Outcome 1.1: Describe Network concepts and technologies

Definition of computer

network

Elements of network

Network benefits

Distinguishing between

network classification

Classifying network by

components roles

Peer to peer network

Client/server network

Classifying network by

geographical area

WAN

LAN

MAN

Introduction to network

technologies

IEEE802.3 Ethernet

IEEE802.5 Token ring

IEEE802.8 Fiber optic

o Group discussion on network

concepts

o Brainstorming on Network

benefits


classification


- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- Pen

- Visual aids

- Paper

Content Learning

activities

Resources

321 | P a g e

IEEE802.11 Wireless





Written or

performance

Oral

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network elements

Network classification

Network technologies

Network benefits

Observation


Proper description of Network concepts and technologies

322 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.2: Describe Network topology

Definition of topology

Network topology types

Logical

Physical

Advantages and disadvantages

of topology


Network topology types


topology types


- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- Visual aids

- Pen

- Paper





Performance

oral

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Types of Network topology

Advantage and disadvantages of topology

Observation

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper description of Network topology

323 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.3: Study network devices, components and their functions

Network devices classification

Interconnection devices

Access devices

End devices

Network components

Media

Message

Protocol

Devices

Router

Hubs

Switch

NIC

Repeater

MAU

Firewall

Access points

Antenna

Gateways


Network devices

classification

o Brainstorming discussion

on Network devices

classification


- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- Router

- Hubs

- Switch

- Cables

- NIC

- Repeater

- Computer

- MAU

- Projector

- Firewall

- Access points

- Antenna

- Gateways




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Adequate study of network devices, components and their functions

324 | P a g e


Written evidence

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network components

Network devices

device functions

Media function

Message function

Protocol function

Observation

325 | P a g e

LU2: Apply network protocols and communications

2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Describe Network Protocols 2. Describe Network standards 3. Identify and apply Network media and connectors

35 Hours

Learning Outcome 2.1: Describe Network Protocols

Introduction to network protocols

Types of most common network

protocols

NetBEUI

TCP/IP

Apple talk

Novell netware(IPX/SPX)

Description of IP terminologies


protocols

o Brainstorming on network

protocols


- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- Pen

- Computer

- Paper

- Visual aids





Content Learning

activities

Resources


Correct description of Network

326 | P a g e

Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false questions Matching Sentence completion Tickingpresentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

IP terminologies

Common network protocols

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.2: Describe Network standards

Importance of standards

Internet standards

Types of standards

De Facto standards

De Jure standards

Standards organizations

ISO

IEEE

ANSI

ITU-Formally CCITT

EIA

telcodia

o Group discussion on Types

of standards


standards


- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- Pen

- Computer

- Paper

- Visual aids




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Protocols

327 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.3 Identify and apply Network media and connectors

Introduction to network media

Types of media

Logical (wireless)

Physical

Coaxial

Thinnet

Thicknet

Twisted pair

UTP, STP, ScTP

Fiber optic

Single mode fiber

Multimode fiber

Types of connectors

RJ45,RJ11

BNC

USB

Firewire

VGA

Serial

BNC-T

o Group discussion on Types

of media and access

methods

o Brainstorming on Types of

media and access methods


o Demonstration by

video/picture on media

- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- Pen

- Computer

- Paper

- Visual aids

Content Learning

activities

Resources

328 | P a g e

F type

MT-RG

RS-232

Advantages and disadvantages of media

Access methods

CSMA/CD

CSMA/CA

Token passing





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network standards

Standards organizations

Observation


Appropriate description of Network standards

329 | P a g e

LU3: Apply IP addressing (IP v4&IPv6)

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Describe IP addressing concepts 2. Apply IPv4 3. Apply IPv6

15 Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1 Describe IP addressing concepts

Introduction to IP address

IP addressing classification

IP addresses grouping

IP addressing scheme

IP addressing subnet masks

Examining the prefix length

Public and private addresses

o Brainstorming on IP

addressing concepts

o Group discussion onIP

addressing


- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- Pen

- Computer

- Paper

- Visual aids





Content Learning

activities

Resources


Correct description of IP addressing concepts

330 | P a g e

Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

product

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

IP addressing classification

IP grouping

IP subnet masks

Public and private addresses

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.2Apply IPv4

Introduction to IPv4

Anatomy of IPv4 address

Assigning IP addresses

Methods of assigning IP address

Automatic method

Static addressing method

Dynamic method

Calculation of IP addresses

Sub-netting

Summarization

Binary to decimal conversion

Decimal to binary conversion

Testing IP addresses

Diagnostic tools

IP addressing forms

Unicasts

Broadcast

Multicast

o Brainstorming on Anatomy

of IPv4 address




- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- Pen

- Computer

- Paper

- Visual aids

Content Learning

activities

Resources

331 | P a g e

Anycast

IP addressing modification

IP broking and firewalls

IP address translation





Written

Performance

Oral

Product

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No


IP addresses assignment


Test IP addresses


IP addressing forms

Observation


Convenient application of IPv4 ( Internet protocol version 4)

332 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.3Apply IPv6

Introduction to IPv6

Migration from IPv4 to IPv6


Assigning IP addresses

Methods of assigning IP address

Automatic method

Static addressing method

Dynamic method


Sub-netting

Summarization

Binary to Hexadecimal

conversion

Hexadecimal to binary

conversion

Testing IP addresses

Diagnostic tools

IP addressing forms

Unicasts

Broadcast

Multicast

Anycast


IP broking and firewalls

IP address translation

o Brainstorming on Anatomy

of IPv6 address




- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- Pen

- Computer

- Paper

- Visual aids




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Convenient application of IPv6( Internet protocol version 6)

333 | P a g e


Written evidence

Performance

Oral

Product

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No


IP addresses assignment

IP address Calculations

IP address Tests

IP addressing forms

Observation

334 | P a g e

N E W N M 4 0 1 - NETWORK MAINTENANCE

NEWNM401 Perform network maintenance


Credits: 7 70

Sector: ICT


Issue date:November, 2014

Purpose statement

This core module describes the skills, knowledge and attitude required to make a preparation

effectively in the computer networks maintenance and networking fields by applying relevant

technical knowledge and technical skills in: Network installation, maintenance, selection, and

optimization of computer systems, computer networks and associated hardware and software

systems. The learner also will have an ability to conduct standard tests and measurements and,

to conduct, analyzes, interpret experiments and write technical Report.


335 | P a g e

Network fundamental

Local Area network

Routing

Switching

Wireless network indoor







1. Conduct site survey and analyse the

site infrastructure

1.1. Efficient Study of the network structure and the

environment

1.2. Adequate verification of network security

1.3. Proper verification of the network status

1.4. Appropriate identification and selection of tools

and materials to be used according to the network

status

2. Determine and implement solutions 2.1. Proper description of network maintenance

2.2. Relevant application of curative maintenance if any

2.3. Relevant application of preventive maintenance

3. Document the work done 3.1 Systematic implementation of SOHO and

Enterprise wireless

3.2 Relevant application of security to the technology

applied

3.3 Efficient test of access point and verifying wireless

connection and security arrangements

Efficient Troubleshooting of WLAN Problems

336 | P a g e

LU 1:Conduct site survey

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Study network structure and the environment 2. Verify network security 3. Verify network status

30 Hours

Learning Outcome 1.1:Study network structure and the environment

.

Identification of network

components

Servers

Client computers

Transmission Media

Network printers and

other peripherals

Network Interface Card

Local Operating System

Network Operating

System

Description of common

network problems

workstation

Operating System

Memory (RAM)

System Clock

Server

Operating System

CPU Usage


structure


maintenance

o Exercises on network

identification of network

problems


Identification of

network components

Servers

Client computers

Transmission

Media

Network printers

and other

peripherals

Network Interface

Card

Local Operating

System

Network Operating

System

Description of common

network problems

workstation

Operating System

Memory (RAM)

Content Learning

activities

Resources

337 | P a g e

Hard Drive Usage

Memory (RAM)

Network Adapter/Network

Interface card( NIC)

System Clock

Firewalls and Filters

Virtual Private Network

(VPN) Software

Network Devices

Hubs, Switches, Routers, and

Gateways

Hardware Firewalls

Network Emulators

Network Address

Translation (NAT)

Virtual Private Network

(VPN)

Identify components, tools

and equipment to be used

Network Components

Network Tools &

equipment

System Clock

Server

Operating System

CPU Usage

Hard Drive Usage

Memory (RAM)

Network

Adapter/Network

Interface card( NIC)

System Clock

Firewalls and Filters

Virtual Private

Network (VPN)

Software

Network Devices

Hubs, Switches,

Routers, and

Gateways

Hardware Firewalls

Network Emulators

Network Address

Translation (NAT)

Virtual Private

Network (VPN)

Identify components,

tools and equipment to

be used

Network Components

Network Tools

& equipment





Efficient Analysis of facilities and existing networks

338 | P a g e


Written evidence


Multiple choice True or false questions Matching Sentence completion Ticking

Presentation Matching

Sentence completion

Concept

Checklist Score

Yes No

Site Planning process

Environment evaluation

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.2: Verify network security

Authentication

Confidentiality

Auditing


security



security

o Lab experiments

- Books

- Internet

- Hand out notes

- Firewall

- Visual aids

- Computer

- Cables

- Switch

- Router

- Simulator software


Content Learning

activities

Resources


AdequateIdentification of components, devices ,tools, connectors and media

339 | P a g e




Written evidence


presentation

Checklist

Score

Yes No

Hardware devices

Hardware components

Software tools

Media

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.3: Verify network status

Network connectivity

verification tools

Ping

Show commands

Trace route

NS lookup

Network monitoring


connectivity verification tools



performance

o Lab experiments

- Books

- Internet

- Hand book notes

- Computer

- Cables

- Switch

- Router



Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper identification of Security requirements

340 | P a g e




Written evidence

Performance evidence True or false questions Matching Sentence completion Ticking

Presentation

True and false questions:

Multiple choice

Self-assessment exercise

Case study analysis

Matching

Sentence completion

Concept

Checklist Score

Yes No

Authentication

Authorization

Confidentiality

Observation

341 | P a g e

LU 2: Determine and implement solutions

2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Apply network preventive maintenance 2. Apply network curative maintenance 3. Test Network

30 Hours

Learning Outcome 2.1Apply network preventive maintenance


preventive maintenance

Preventive network

maintenance tasks:

Regular cleaning

Back up and security

system

Network upgrading

Requirements for

scalability

Requirements for

availability

Applications software

updating

Applications

software

deployment


maintenance


maintenance tasks

o Lab exercise on network

maintenance


- Books

- Internet

- Hand book notes

- Computer

- Cables

- Switch

- Router

- Brower machine


Content Learning

activities

Resources

342 | P a g e




Written evidence

Multiple choice True or false questions Matching Sentence completion Ticking Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network upgrade and software updates

Back up and security system

software deployment

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.2:Apply network curative maintenance


curative maintenance

Review on Common

problems that occur in the

network

Common network solutions

description

Usage of Troubleshooting

tools

Curative network

maintenance tasks:


network maintenance


maintenance tasks

o Lab exercise on network

maintenance


- Books

- Internet

- Hand book notes

- Switch

- Router

- Computer

- Cables

- Brower machine

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper description of network maintenance

343 | P a g e

Problem identification





Written evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

Common network problems


Troubleshooting tools

Select a best solution

Observation

Learning Outcome 2.3: Test Network

Why network test

Types of network tests

Network testing tools

o Group discussion on Types of

network tests


testing tools

o Lab Exercises on testing

network connectivity


- Internet

- Reference books

- Handout notes

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Relevant application of curative maintenance if any

344 | P a g e





Written evidence


Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network testing tools

Network tests

Observation


Relevant application of preventive maintenance

345 | P a g e

LU 3:Document the work done

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Document on network status 2. Report on the work done 3. Write technical journal and recommendation

.

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1:Document on network status

Description of network status

before

Status of network

infrastructure

describe problems

found

Review of user manual and

previous report

Suggestion of solutions on

problems found

Description of solution

implementation

Description of procedures of the

task accomplished

Network Devices, equipment

and materials used

Description of the network

status after work

Technical journal and

recommendation report

o Brainstorming on Status of

network infrastructure

o Group discussion on writing

technical report

o Exercises on writing report


- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools

Content Learning

activities

Resources

346 | P a g e

Necessity of fertigation Benefits of fertigation Fertigationequipement Components of

fertigationunit:

Fertigator

Fertilizer tank

Non return valve

Main filter

Water meter Types of injector for

fertigation

Oral presentation on:

Necessity of fertigation

Benefits of fertigation

Types of injectors for fertigation

Observation offertigationunit

- Flip chart - Books - Technical

manual - Water - Fertilizer - Fertigation unit





Written evidence

Multiple choice True or false questions Matching Sentence completion Ticking Presentation s

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network status

Report and user manual revision

Description of procedures of the task accomplished

Observation


Accurate documentation of review process

347 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.2:Report on the work done

Description of network

status before

Status of network

infrastructure

describe

problems found

Review of user manual

and previous report

Suggestion of solutions

on problems found


implementation

Description of

procedures of the task

accomplished

Network Devices,

equipment and materials

used

Description of the

network status after

work






technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Effective reporting procedures of the task accomplished are in place and used

348 | P a g e


Written evidence o Performance evidence o Performance evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

Recommendation

network status after work

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.3Write technical journal and recommendation


before

Status of network

infrastructure

describe problems

found


previous report


problems found


implementation


task accomplished

Network Devices, equipment

and materials used

Description of the network

status after work




technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools

Content Learning

activities

Resources

349 | P a g e







Written evidence


Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Journal and recommendation report

Observation


Methodical Writing of the technical journal and recommendation

350 | P a g e

Summative Assessment

Integrated situation Resources

IPRC Kigali located in Kicukiro District has network problems in its network installation, among its network components; four computers and two printers are not connected to the network. Usernames and password of network backup storage devices are not matching; wireless network portable devices are not able to connect to the network, antivirus is not updated and network devices are not cleaned (Hardware and system software). The Head of ICT Department in IPRC Kigali requested you as an IT Technician to solve above mentioned problems mitigate network attacks and produce a documented report of the respective network within 3 hours.If the performance of the task is below the maximum time required (3Hours), it will be taken under consideration.

Cutting tool Crimping tool Stripping tool Patching tool Cable tester Screw drivers NIC adapter Formatter board RJ-45 connectors RJ-45 cap Outlet sockets NIC not working Network cable Formatter board Firewall Switch Router Access point Computer Tool kit

Network monitoring

Assesment Criterion 1: Quality of Process

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Problems identification is well done

NIC not working

Network cable not working

Switch port not working

Formatter board not working

Check the firewall

Hardware configuration

Software configuration

Network monitoring

IP address

The printer is plugged?

The printer Is turned ON?

Indicator: Tools and equipment are well selected

351 | P a g e

Assesment Criterion 2: Quality of product

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Computers are well connected to the network

Availability of connectivity

Indicator: Wireless is well accessible

Portable device access wireless

Availability of wireless connectivity

Indicator: Username and password are matching

Access to the backup storage

Indicator: Printers are well connected to the network

Access of printer over the network

Observation

Cutting tool

Crimping tool

Stripping tool

Patching tool

Cable tester

Screw drivers

NIC adapter

Formatter board

RJ-45 connectors

RJ-45 cap

Socket

Indicator:Troubleshooting steps are properly followed

Network infrastructure status Network connection down

No IP address

No DNS server

No default gateway

Misconfigured

Observation

352 | P a g e

Assesment Criterion 3: Relevance

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Materials are well used

No waste of materials

Indicator:The time is respected

Time required(3h)

Indicator: The report is Produced

Required report produced

Observation

Assesment Criterion:Perfection

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: .Workplace is well cleaned

No rubbish

IndicatorNetwork components are well cleaning

No dusts

Indicator: Time is well managed

Time bellow the maximum expected

Observation

353 | P a g e

References

1. Bradley, T. (2010). Introduction to Firewalls. (2010) In About.com: Internet/Network

Security . Retrieved

2. February 17, 2010. http://netsecurity.about.com/od/hackertools/a/aa072004.htm

3. Brewer, D. (2009). Picture Yourself Networking Your Home or Small Office. Boston:

Course Technology.

4. Camara (2009). Networking Course. Unpublished. For more information contact

[email protected]

5. Computer Network. (2010, February 2). In Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia. Retrieved

February 3, 2010,

6. from http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Computer_network&oldid=341486930

7. Dionys, D. (2008). How to Make a Network Cable. Unpublished. Produced for the VVOB

Program in Zambia

8. March 23, 2010, from http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=High-

Speed_Downlink_Packet_

9. Mitchell, B. (2010). Computer and Wireless Networking Basics. Retrieved March 1, 2010,

from About.com:

10.

http://compnetworking.about.com/od/basicneworkingconcepts/u/computer_networki

ng_basics.htm

11. Mitchell, B. (2010). Introduction to Client Server Networks. Retrieved March 1, 2010,

from About.com: http://

12. compnetworking.about.com/od/basicnetworkingfaqs/a/client-server.htm

13. Mitchell, B. (2010). Wireless Standards. Retrieved March 1, 2010, from About.com:

http://compnetworking.

14. Network. (n.d.). Dictionary.com Unabridged. Retrieved February 02, 2010, from

Dictionary.com website:

15. Network topology. (2010, February 8). In Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia. Retrieved

February 9, 2010,

16. from http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Network_topology&oldid=342762416

354 | P a g e

N E W S L 4 0 1 - LAN

NEWSL401 Set up LAN


Credits: 12 120

Sector: ICT



Purpose statement

This Specific module introduces set up LAN. The course materials will assist in developing the Knowledge,

skills and attitude necessary to Plan and implement small and medium enterprise networks. The leaner

will be able to analyze facilities and existing network, Describe the purpose and functions of various

network devices, LAN applications, LAN architecture, install and configure shared network devices, Select

the appropriate media, cables, ports, and connectors to connect switches and router, Describe the

technology and media access control method for Ethernet networks, Implement an IP addressing scheme

and IP Services to meet network requirements in small and medium-size


355 | P a g e

Computer applications

Network fundamentals







1. Apply basics of Computer

networking and set up a LAN

1.1. Proper Introduction and definition of Network 1.2. Proper Application of LAN Concepts and

architectures 1.3. Appropriate application of Basics of computer

networking 1.4. Proper setting up of a LAN and shared devices

2. Conduct site survey 2.1. Efficient Analysis of facilities and existing networks 2.2. Adequate Identification of components, devices

,tools, connectors and media 2.3. Proper identification of Security requirements 2.4. Proper design and interpretation of Building

blueprint

3. Configure and troubleshoot a LAN 3.1 Proper configuration of IOS Proper configuration of LAN IP settings

3.2 Proper troubleshooting of local area network

4. Document the work done 4.1 Accurate documentation of review process 4.2 Effective reporting procedures of the task

accomplished are in place and used 4.3 Methodical Writing of the technical journal and

recommendation

356 | P a g e

LU 1:Apply basics of Computer networking and set up a LAN

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Introduce Network 2. Apply LAN Concepts and architectures 3. Apply Basics of computer networking

4. Set up a LAN and shared devices

40 Hours

Learning Outcome1.1Introduce Network

Introduction and definitions of common terms used in local area network: Computer network The internet Internet service provider(

ISP) Firewall IP address TCP/IP DHCP MAC Address

The purpose of local area network

o Brainstorming on the purpose of local area network

o Group discussion on common terms used in local area network

o Further research on internet

- Internet - Books - Paper - Pen - Computer - Visual aids - Handout notes




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper Introduction and definition of Network

357 | P a g e


Written

oral

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Purpose of local area network

Basic terms used in LAN

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.2Apply LAN Concepts and architectures

LAN applications

Personal computer LANS

Low cost

Limited data rate

Back end networks

Interconnecting large

systems(mainframes and large

storage devices)

Storage area networks

Separate network handling

storage needs

Detaches storage tasks from

specific servers

Shared storage facility across

high-speed network

Hard disks, tape libraries, CD

arrays

Improved client-server storage

access

Direct storage to storage

communication for backup

o Brainstorming on LAN Concepts

o Group discussion on LAN

concepts


- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Visual aids

- Handout notes

Content Learning

activities

Resources

358 | P a g e

High speed office networks

Desktop image processing

High capacity local storage

Backbone LANs

Interconnect low speed local

LANs

Reliability

Capacity

Cost

LAN architecture

Topologies

Tree

Bus

Ring

star

choice of medium

Constrained by LAN

topology

Capacity

Reliability

Types of data supported

Environmental scope

Protocol architecture

Lower layers of OSI model

IEEE 802 reference model

Physical

Logical link control (LLC)

Media access control (MAC)

Bridges

Why bridge

Reliability

Performance

Security

Geography

Functions of a bridge

Bridge operation

Bridge design aspects

Bridge protocol architecture


359 | P a g e




Written

oral

Multiple choice


Matching

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

LAN Applications

LAN Architecture

Protocol architecture

Bridge

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.3: Apply Basics of computer networking

Introduction to basic computer networking

Networking common used components

Router Wireless routers Cables Switches Access point Adapter cards Bridges

o Brainstorming on Basics of computer networking

o Group discussion onBasics of computer networking


- Internet - Books - Paper - Pen - Computer - Hand out notes

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper Description of LAN Concepts and architectures

360 | P a g e

Servers Repeater Shared hardware Modem PC Rack mount Truncks Patch panel Cable manager

Network characteristics

Access methods CSMA/CD CSMA/CA

Network architecture Baseband Via

broadband Ethernet Token ring FDDI





Written

Oral

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network components

Access methods

Network architecture types


Appropriate description of Basics of computer networking

361 | P a g e

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.4: Set up a LAN and shared devices

Steps of setting up a simple

LAN

Network components

Mount

Router installation

Wired computer to

the router

Connection

Switch to the router

Connection

wireless computers

to the router

Access point to the

router Connection

Shared network devices

Installation

Sharing network devices on

LAN

o Brainstorming on shared

devices

o Group discussion onsetting

up a simple LAN


o Lab exercise on setting up a

LAN

- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Router

- Switch

- Cables

- Shared devices




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper setting up of a LAN and shared devices

362 | P a g e


Written

Oral

Product

Multiple choice


Checklist Score

Yes No

Trunks Fixing

Laying cables

Termination of cables

Observation

363 | P a g e


2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Analyze facilities and existing networks 2. Identify components, devices ,tools, connectors and media 3. Identify Security requirements 4. Design and interpret Building blueprint

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 2.1Analyze facilities and existing networks


Initial environment

evaluation

Selection of router

deployment


Physical site survey

Passive physical site

survey methodology

Active survey

methodology

Analysis of existing

system

Current network

usage

Future network usage

o Brainstorming on site planning

process


environment evaluation

o Demonstration by video/

picture of analysis of existing

system


- Books

- Router

- IT Tool Kit

- Cables

- Visual aids

- Internet


- Computer

- Hand-out notes


Content Learning

activities

Resources

364 | P a g e




Written evidence

True and false Matching Sentence completion Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No



Observation

Learning Outcome 2.2:Identify components, devices ,tools, connectors and media

Hardware Devices:

Internetworking Devices:

Router

Multilayer switches,

Wireless Router

Networking Access Devices:

Switches

Wireless Access Point

Security Devices:

Firewalls

o Brainstorming on Hardware

Devices

o Observe network devices and

software systems


Troubleshooting Tools

o Exercises or Labs


- Router

- Switch

- Bridge

- Wireless Access

Point

- Firewalls

- Wireless Router

- End Devices

- NICs

Content Learning

activities

Resources



365 | P a g e

End Devices:

Computers(Work stations,

laptops,file servers,web

servers)

Network Printers

Security Cameras

Mobile Handheld

Devices(Smartphones,Table

ts,PDAs)

Hardware Components:

NIC

Wireless Adapter cards

Troubleshooting Tools:

Ipconfig /all

Ping

Trace route

Nslook up

Debug

Netstat

putty/Tera Term

Subnet and IP

calculator

Speedtest.net/pingt

est.netpathping/mtr

route

Software Tools:

Packet

Tracer

Edraw Max

Internetwork Operating

System(IOS)

Versions

Updating and

upgrading IOS

IOS types

Connectors:

RJ45,RJ11

Media:

WAN cables( Serial

cable)

- Wireless Adapter

Cards

- Straight cables

- Crosse over Cables

- Internet

- Books

- RJ45 Connectors

- Mobile Handheld

Devices( Smart

phones, Tablets,

PDAs)

366 | P a g e

LAN cables ( Straight

and Cross over

cable)

Console cable

Aux cable

USB to Serial Converter





Written evidence

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

Hardware devices

Hardware components

Software tools

Media

Connectors


Observation

Learning Outcome 2.3: Identify Security requirements


Adequate Identification of components, devices,tools, connectors and media

367 | P a g e

Authentication

Confidentiality

Auditing

o Brainstorming on Auditing,

Confidentiality and

Authentication

o Practical exercises on device

configuration


picture


- Internet

- Books

- Rack

- Hand-out notes

- Computer

- Visual aids





Written evidence

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

Authentication

Authorization

Confidentiality

Observation

Content Learning

activities

Resources



368 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 2.4 Design and interpret Building blueprint

Draw a schematic diagram

of the system using:

EdrawMax or Packet

Tracer

o Brainstorming on

interpretation of Building

blueprint

o Group discussion on schematic

diagram

o Exercises or Labs


- Internet

- Books

- Simulator Software

- Hand-out notes

- Computer

- Visual aids





Written evidence

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

LAN sketching and interpretation

Observation

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper design and interpretation of Building blueprint

369 | P a g e

LU 3:Configure and troubleshoot a LAN

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. configure IOS 2. Configure LAN IP settings 3. Troubleshoot local area network

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1configure IOS

IOS bootcamp

IOS access device configuration

Console

Telnet or SSH

Aux pot

IOS Configuration modes and sub

modes

User EXEC mode

Privileged EXEC mode

Global configuration

mode

Other mode/sub mode

IOS command structure

Prompt

Command

Space

Keyword or arguments

Hot key and shortcuts

IOS examination commands

o Brainstorming on IOS access

devices configuration

o Group discussion on IOS

configuration

o Practical exercises on modes

and sub-modes

configuration


picture


- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Router

- Switch

- Cables

- Handout note

- Visual aids

- Packet tracer

Content Learning

activities

Resources

370 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

IOS bootcamp process

IOS access device configuration

IOS Configuration modes and sub modes

IOS command structure

IOS examination commands

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.2 Configure LAN IP settings

IP addressing scheme

IP address structure

IP Subnet mask

Configuring DNS

o Brainstorming on IP

addressing

o Group discussion on IP

addressing scheme

- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper configuration of IOS

371 | P a g e

Dynamic

Static

Assigning IP to the interface

Configuring switch virtual

interface

Assigning IP to the end

devices

Using DHCP

Static Assignment

Configuring loopback address

Testing interface assignment using

show command

Testing end to end connectivity

using ping command

o Practical exercises on sub-

netting and configuring IPs


picture


- Computer

- Router

- Switch

- Cables

- Handout note

- Visual aids

- Packet tracer





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Product

Performance

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Testing end to end connectivity using ping

Observation


Proper configuration of LAN IP settings

372 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.3.Troubleshoot local area network

Problem Identification

When the console does not

respond

When the Traffic does not go

through

Possible LAN problems causes

The remote or local

interface is down

Incorrect address of the

remote or local interface

A conflict of IP addresses

Domain is down

The interfaces are down

Troubleshooting steps

Verification of cable connectivity

Verification for the power supply

Verification of LAN devices LEDs

status

Verification of network software

Troubleshooting tools:

Diagnostic commands

Show commands

Debug commands

Ping commands

Traceroute/Tracert commands

NSlook up

Ipconfig/ifconfig

Netstat

Basic utilities

Putty/Tera Term

Subnet and Ip Calculator

Utility application Software

Speedtest.net/pingtest.netpathpi

ng/mtr

Hardware tools:

o Brainstorming on problem

identification

o Group discussion

Troubleshooting steps and

tools


troubleshooting using basic

utilities


picture


- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Router

- Switch

- Cables

- Handout note

- Visual aids

- Packet tracer

Content Learning

activities

Resources

373 | P a g e

Troubleshooting Tools kit





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No




Basic utilities

Observation


Proper troubleshooting of local area network

374 | P a g e

LU 4: Document the work done

4

Learning Outcomes:


20 Hours

Learning Outcome 4. 1 Document on network status


before

Status of network

infrastructure

describe problems found


previous report


problems found


implementation


task accomplished

Network Devices, equipment and

materials used

Description of the network status

after work






technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools

Content Learning

activities

Resources

375 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Sentence completion

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network status


Observation

Learning Outcome 4. 2 Report on the work done

Description of network status before

Status of network infrastructure


Review of user manual and previous

report

Suggestion of solutions on problems

found


implementation

Description of procedures of the task

accomplished




technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools

Content Learning

activities

Resources



376 | P a g e


materials used


after work







Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Checklist Score

Yes No

Recommendation

Observation

Learning Outcome 4. 3 Write technical journal and recommendation





report




technical report


- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Effective reporting procedures of thetask accomplished are in place and used

377 | P a g e


found


implementation


accomplished


materials used


after work




- Drawing tools





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Written evidence

Checklist Score

Yes No

Observation



378 | P a g e

LU 5:Troubleshoot router

5

Learning Outcomes:

1. Document the work done 2. Report on the work done 3. Write technical journal and recommendation

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 5.1: Document the work done


before

Status of network

infrastructure



previous report


problems found


implementation


task accomplished


materials used


after work






technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools

Content Learning

activities

Resources

379 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network status



Observation



380 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 5.2. Report on the work done





report


found


implementation


accomplished


materials used


after work






technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Content Learning

activities

Resources



381 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Recommendation

Observation

LearningOutcome 5.3Write technical journal and recommendation





report


found


implementation


accomplished


materials used


after work






technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools




Content Learning

activities

Resources



382 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Observation

References

1. Principles of power system, V.K MEHTA , ROHIT MEHTA, S.CHAND &COMPANY, NEW DELHI 2004

383 | P a g e

N E W P R 4 0 1 - ROUTING

NEWPR401 Perform routing


Credits: 12 120

Sector: ICT



Purpose statement

This module describes the skills, knowledge and attitude to be acquired by the learner to configure

routers for providing interconnection between different networks. The learner will be able to Install,

configure, and differentiate common network devices, Evaluate the network based on configuration

management documentation, configure , verify and troubleshoot basic router operation, Interpret

network diagrams, Configure and verify operation status of a device interface, configure and verify

classless and classfullrouting protocols, default and static route


384 | P a g e

Computer Fundamentals

Network Fundamentals

Local Area Network







1. Introduce routing and packet

forwarding

1.1. Proper description of routing Concepts 1.2. Efficient Configuration of Static and Default route 1.3. Proper application of HSRP( Hot standby router

protocol) 1.4. Precise Implementation of router security

2. Conduct site survey 2.1. Efficient Analysis of facilities and existing networks 2.2. Adequate Identification of components, devices

,tools, connectors and media 2.3. Proper identification of Security requirements 2.4. Proper design and interpretation of Building

blueprint

3. Configure and verify routing

protocols

3.1. Efficient Application of Classfull routing protocols 3.2. Adequate Application of VLSM and Classless Inter-

Domain Router(CIDR) 3.3. Efficient application of Classless routing protocols

4. Troubleshoot router 4.1 Systematic identification and correction of common problems associated with IP addressing and host configurations.

4.2 Adequate application of troubleshooting of device configuration and network connectivity using basic utilities

4.3 Correct application of troubleshooting of router hardware and software operation

5. Document the work done 5.1 Accurate documentation of review process 5.2 Effective reporting procedures of the task

accomplished are in place and used 5.3 Methodical Writing of the technical journal and

recommendation

385 | P a g e

LU 1: Introduce routing and packet forwarding

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Describe routing Concepts 2. Configure Static and default route 3. Apply Hot standby router protocol (HSRP 4. Implement router security

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 1.1:Describe routing Concepts.

Functions and Features of Router

Why Routing?

Router hardware components

Packet Forwarding methods

Default Gateways

Document Network Addressing

Console Access

Basic Router Configuration

look back interface

configuration

Path Determination

Routing Table

Routing Protocols Types

Static Routes

Default Routes

Dynamic Routing:

RIPv1,RIPv2,IGRP,

EIGRP,OSPF,IS-

IS,BGP

o Group discussion on router

operation

o Brainstorming on routing protocols

o Practical exercises on router

operation

o Demonstration by video/ picture


- Books

- Router

- Internet

- Video aide

- Simulator

Software

- Hand-out notes


Content Learning

activities

Resources

386 | P a g e




Written evidence


True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

Functions and Features of Router

Types of routing protocols

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.2: Configure Static and default route

Static routing

Static routing

configuration

Configuring static and

default routes

Review of CIDR and

VLSM

o Group discussion on static

routing

o Brainstorming default route

configuration



picture

o Further research on internet.

- Books

- Router

- Internet

- Video aide


- Hand-out notes

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper description of routing Concepts

387 | P a g e

Configuration of

Summary and

Floating Static Routes

Troubleshoot static

and Default routes

issues





Written evidence

True and false Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose Multiple choice

Checklist

Score

Yes No

Configuration of static route and default routes

Configuration of Summary and Floating Static Routes

Troubleshooting of static and Default routes issues

Observation


Efficient Configuration of Static and Default route

388 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.3: Apply Hot standby router protocol (HSRP)

Description of HSRP

HSRP version and

features

HSRP Advantages

HSRP Application

HSRP configuration

Default HSRP

configuration

HSRP configuration

guidelines

Enabling HSRP steps

Authentication and

timers

HSRP groups and

clustering

HSRP Troubleshooting

o Group discussion on HSRP

Description

o Brainstorming on HSRP

configuration

o Practical exercises HSRP

configuration

o Demonstration by video on

how to configure HSRP

o Further research on internet.

- Books

- Router

- Internet

- Video aide


- Hand-out notes

- Computer

- Switch





Written evidence Multiple choice True or false questions Matching Sentence completion Ticking

Presentation

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Multiple choice

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper application of HSRP( Hot standby router protocol)

389 | P a g e

expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

HSRP version and features

HSRP Advantages

HSRP Application

HSRP Priority Setting

HSRP configuration

HSRP Troubleshooting

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.4: Implement router security

Router Access Security

Protecting the router itself

Physical Security

Operating System

Logins & Banners

Privilegies

Passwords

Accounts

Protecting the Network with router

Roles in network

operations and security

Interior Routers

Backbone Routers

Border Routers

Packet Filters for TCP/IP

o Group discussion

o Brainstorming



picture

o Further research on

internet.

o


Protecting the

router itself

Physical Security

Operating System

Logins & Banners

Privilegies

Passwords

Accounts

Protecting the Network

with router

Roles in network

operations and

security

Interior Routers

Backbo

ne

Content Learning

activities

Resources

390 | P a g e

Permission of Only

Required Protocols and

Services

Rejection of Risk

Protocols and Services

Standards ports and Protocols

Address Filtering

Router

s

Border

Router

s

Packet Filters for TCP/IP

Permission of

Only Required

Protocols and

Services

Rejection of

Risk Protocols

and Services

Standards ports and

Protocols

Address Filtering






Presentation

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Multiple choice

expose

Checklist Score

Yes No



Precise Implementation of router security

391 | P a g e

Network Protection with router

Packet Filters for TCP/IP Standards ports and Protocols

Standards ports and Protocols

Observation

392 | P a g e


2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Analyze facilities and existing networks 2. Identify components, devices ,tools, connectors and

media 3. Identify Security requirements 4. Design and interpret Building blueprint

20 Hours



Initial environment

evaluation

Selection of router

deployment




survey methodology

Active survey

methodology


system

Current network

usage



process





system


- Books

- Router

- IT Tool Kit

- Cables

- Visual aids

- Internet


- Computer

- Hand-out notes


Content Learning

activities

Resources

393 | P a g e




Written evidence

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No



Observation


Hardware Devices:


Router


Wireless Router

Networking Access Devices:

Switches


Security Devices:

Firewalls

End Devices:


Devices


software systems



o Exercises or Labs


- Router

- Switch

- Bridge

- Wireless Access

Point

- Firewalls

- Wireless Router

- End Devices

- NICs

- Wireless Adapter

Cards

Content Learning

activities

Resources



394 | P a g e

Computers(Work stations,

laptops,file servers,web

servers)

Network Printers

Security Cameras

Mobile Handheld

Devices(Smartphones,Tablet

s,PDAs)


NIC



Ipconfig /all

Ping

Trace route

Nslook up

Debug

Netstat

putty/Tera Term

Subnet and IP

calculator

Speedtest.net/pingte

st.netpathping/mtr

route

Software Tools:

Packet Tracer

Edraw Max


System(IOS)

Versions

Updating and

upgrading IOS

IOS types

Connectors:

RJ45,RJ11

Media:

WAN cables( Serial

cable)

LAN cables ( Straight

and Cross over cable)

Console cable

- Straight cables

- Crosse over Cables

- Internet

- Books

- RJ45 Connectors

- Mobile Handheld

Devices( Smart

phones, Tablets,

PDAs)

395 | P a g e

Aux cable






Written evidence

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

Hardware devices

Hardware components

Software tools

Media

Connectors

Observation


Adequate Identification of components, devices,tools, connectors and media

396 | P a g e


Authentication

Confidentiality

Auditing


Confidentiality and

Authentication


configuration


picture


- Internet

- Books

- Rack

- Hand-out notes

- Computer

- Visual aids

-





Written evidence

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

Authentication

Authorization

Confidentiality

Observation

Content Learning

activities

Resources



397 | P a g e




EdrawMax or Packet

Tracer

o Brainstorming on


blueprint


diagram

o Exercises or Labs


- Internet

- Books


- Hand-out notes

- Computer

- Visual aids





Written evidence

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No


Observation

Content Learning

activities

Resources



398 | P a g e

LU 3:Configure and verify Routing Protocols

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Apply Classfull routing protocols

2. Apply VLSM and Classless Inter-Domain Router(CIDR)

3. Apply Classless routing protocols

40 Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1Apply Classfull routing protocols

Introduction to sub-netting

Class full IP addressing IP address scheme

Class A Class B Class C Class D Class E

RIPv1 RIPv1 Operation RIPv1 Configuration RIPv1 Summarizations RIPv1 Verification RIPv1 Troubleshooting Processing RIP Updates

IGRP IGRP Operation IGRP Configuration IGRP Summarizations IGRP Verification IGRP Troubleshooting

o Group discussion on classfull

Addressing

o Brainstorming on RIPv1 and

IGRP



picture


- Router

- Books

- Video aid

- Internet


- Cables

- Computer

- Hand-out notes

Content Learning

activities

Resources

399 | P a g e

Processing IGRP Updates





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

product

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

IP address scheme

RIPv1

IGRP

IGRP Updates

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.2 Apply VLSM and Classless Inter-Domain Router(CIDR)

Review to sub-netting

VLSM and IP Addressing

Basic VLSM Calculation and

Addressing design Activity

Challenge VLSM calculation and

Addressing design Activity

o Group discussion on VLSM

and IP Addressing

o Brainstorming on CIDR

o Practical exercises on VLSM

and CIDR


picture

- Books

- Video aid

- Internet

- Router

- Hand-out notes

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Efficient Application of Classfull routing protocols

400 | P a g e

Troubleshooting a VLSM

Addressing Design Activity

Classless Inter-Domain Routing(CIDR)

CIDR & Route Summarization

Calculating route

Summarization






Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

product

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

VLSM and IP Addressing Summarization

CIDR & Route Summarization

Calculation of route Summarization

CIDR blocks Assignment

Observation


Adequate Application of VLSM and Classless Inter-Domain Router(CIDR)

401 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.3: Apply Classless routing protocols

EIGRP

Configuring EIGRP for IPv4

EIGRP Network Topology

Autonomous System

numbers

Router EIGRP Commands

EIGRP Router ID

Passive interface

Verifying EIGRP

Troubleshooting of EIGRP

Issues


EIGRP Network Topology

Autonomous System

numbers

Router EIGRP Commands

EIGRP Router ID

Passive interface

Verifying EIGRP

Troubleshooting of EIGRP

Issues

OSPFv2 (Single OSPF)

Configuration of OSPFv2 for

IPv4

OSPFv2 Network Topology

Autonomous System

numbers

Router OSPFv2 Commands

OSPFv2 Router ID

Passive interface

Verifying OSPFv2

Troubleshooting of OSPFv2

Issues

OSPFv3 (Multi-area OSPF)

o Group discussion on EIGRP

Configuration

o Brainstorming on OSPF

Configuration

o Practical exercises on EIGRP

and OSPF Configuration


picture


- Router

- Books

- Video aid

- Internet


- Cables

- Computer

- Hand-out notes

Content Learning

activities

Resources

402 | P a g e

Configuration of OSPFv3 for

IPv6

OSPFv3 Network Topology

Autonomous System

numbers

Router OSPFv3 Commands

OSPFv3 Router ID

Passive interface

Verification of OSPFv3

Troubleshooting of OSPFv3

Issues





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

product

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No



OSPFv2 (Single OSPF)

Observation


Efficient application of Classless routing protocols

403 | P a g e

404 | P a g e


4

Learning Outcomes:

1. Identify and correct common problems associated with IP addressing and host configurations

2. Apply Troubleshooting of device configuration and network connectivity

3. Apply troubleshooting of router hardware and software operation

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 4.1Identify and correct common problems associated with IP addressing

and host configurations


When the console does not

respond

When the Traffic does not go

through

Possible router problems

causes

Routing issues

High CPU utilization

Interface down

Wedged interfaces


Verification of cable

connectivity

Verification for the power

supply

Verification of router LEDs

status



o Brainstorming on Possible

router problems


configuration


picture


- Router

- Books

- IT tools kit

- Video aid

- Internet


- Cables

- Computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources

405 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence

product

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No


Basic utilities

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.2. Apply Troubleshooting of device configuration and network

connectivity


Troubleshooting tools:

Diagnostic commands

Show commands

Debug commands

Ping commands

Traceroute/Tracert commands

NSlook up



o Brainstorming on



troubleshooting devices

configuration

- Router

- Books

- IT tools kit

- Video aid

- Internet

- Simulator

software

- Cables

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Systematic identification and correction of common problems associated with IP

addressing and host configurations

406 | P a g e

Ipconfig/ifconfig

Netstat

Basic utilities

Tutty/Tera Term

Subnet and Ip Calculator

Speedtest.net/pingtest.netpathping/

mtr


picture


internet

- Computer





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

product

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No


Solving Problems

Hardware tools

IT Tools kit

Observation


Adequate application of troubleshooting of device configuration and network

connectivity using basic utilities

407 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 4.3 Apply troubleshooting of router hardware and software operation


Solving Problems

Troubleshooting the Power and Cooling

Systems

Environmental Reporting Features

Troubleshooting Modules, Cables, and

Connections

Reading System LEDs

Reading Port and Module LEDs

System Messages

Hardware tools:

IT Tools kit



o Brainstorming on



troubleshooting devices

configuration


picture


internet

- Router

- Books

- Troubleshooting

tools kit

- Video aid

- Internet

- Simulator

software

- Cables

- Computer





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Product

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Correct application of troubleshooting of router hardware and software

operation

408 | P a g e


Problems solution

Hardware tools

IT Tools kit

Observation

409 | P a g e


5

Learning Outcomes:

1. Document the work done 2. Report on the work done 3. Write technical journal and recommendation

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 5.1 Document the work done


before

Status of network

infrastructure



previous report


problems found


implementation


task accomplished


materials used


after work






technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools

Content Learning

activities

Resources

410 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network status



Observation

Learning Outcome 5.2. Report on the work done





report




technical report


- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources



411 | P a g e


found


implementation


accomplished


materials used


after work




- Drawing tools





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Recommendation

Observation



412 | P a g e

LearningOutcome 5.3:Write technical journal and recommendation





report


found


implementation


accomplished


materials used


after work






technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice


Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Presentation

Content Learning

activities

Resources



413 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Observation



The ULK (Independent University of Kigali) located in Kigali city; GASABO

district wants to set up a network of 250 PCs. The above network has

two LANs into two buildings (Academics and Administration). The LAN 1

has 150 hosts and LAN 2 has 100 hosts.Given a private IP address

172.16.0.0/16, a public IP address 10.10.10.5/25, a DNS server 2.4.2.4,

The VLSM will be used so that the addressing requirement can be met

using the172.16.0.0/16.

As Network technician; you are requested to install and configure the

routers so that the two LANs can communicate and the whole network

has the internet access. The above works are intended to be done in 3

hours.

Note: If the performance of task is below the maximum time required

(3Hours), it will be taken under consideration.

Routers

Switches

Computer

Cables

Simulator

(Packettracer)

Console cable

Serial to USB adapter

414 | P a g e


Checklist Score

Yes

No

Indicator: The site survey is well done

Site survey report

Indicator: Tools, equipment and materials are properly selected

Router

Switches

Computers

Straight through cable

Simulator (Packet tracer)

Console cable


Connectors

Cross over cable

Compatibility of hardware to be installed

Indicator: The router is properly installed and configured

Hardware installation

IP address

Interface status

Protocols

Indicator: Routing Troubleshooting steps are properly followed

Network reachable

Router Can fragment

reachable protocol

Ports reachable

Reachable hosts

Observation

415 | P a g e


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: The Router is well mounted

Steadiness

Tightness

Fitness

Indicator: The Router is well secured

Username and Passwords set

Log in Banners

Indicator: Internet is accessible

Browse on Internet

Indicator: Materials are well used

No wasted materials

Observation


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: The time is respected

Time required(3h)

Indicator: The internetwork is well done

Networks communicating

Indicator:The report is Produced

Report format

Report content

Observation

416 | P a g e

Perfection Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Workplace is well cleaned

No rubbish

Indicator: Network components are well cleaning

No dusts

Indicator:.Time is well managed


Indicator:UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) and grounding is used

No disturbance when power is off

Observation

Reference books: 1. 2G. (2010). In Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia. Retrieved March 23, 2010, from http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=2G&oldid=351283538 2. Bradley, T. (2010). Introduction to Firewalls. (2010) In About.com: Internet/Network Security . Retrieved February 17, 2010. http://netsecurity.about.com/od/hackertools/a/aa072004.htm 3. Brewer, D. (2009). Picture Yourself Networking Your Home or Small Office. Boston: Course Technology. 4. Camara (2009). Networking Course. Unpublished. For more information contact [email protected] 5. Computer Network. (2010, February 2). In Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia. Retrieved February 3, 2010, from http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Computer_network&oldid=341486930 6. Dionys, D. (2008). How to Make a Network Cable. Unpublished. Produced for the VVOB Program in Zambia 2008-2013. For more information about VVOB see www.vvob.be. 7. General Packet Radio Service. (2010, February 2). In Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia. Re¬trieved February 10, 2010, from http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=General_Packet_Radio_Service&oldid=341574212 8. Mitchell, B. (2010). Computer and Wireless Networking Basics. Retrieved March 1, 2010, from About.com: http://compnetworking.about.com/od/basicneworkingconcepts/u/computer_networking_basics.htm 9. Mitchell, B. (2010). Introduction to Client Server Networks. Retrieved March 1, 2010, from About.com: http://compnetworking.about.com/od/basicnetworkingfaqs/a/client-server.htm 10. Network. (n.d.). Dictionary.com Unabridged. Retrieved February 02, 2010, from Dictionary.com website: http://dictionary.reference.com/browse/network 11. Network topology. (2010, February 8). In Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia. Retrieved February 9, 2010, from http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Network_topology&oldid=342762416

http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=2G&oldid=351283538

http://netsecurity.about.com/od/hackertools/a/aa072004.htm

http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Computer_network&oldid=341486930

http://www.vvob.be/

http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=General_Packet_Radio_Service&oldid=341574212

http://dictionary.reference.com/browse/network

417 | P a g e

N E W P S 4 0 1 - SWITCHING

NEWPS401 Perform switching


Credits: 12 120

Sector: ICT



Purpose statement

This core module describes the skills, knowledge and attitude required to make a preparation effectively

in switch by applying relevant technical knowledge and technical skills : The learner will be able to

describe,Configure troubleshoot and implement VLAN trucking ,VTP and STP,PVST+,RSTP and rapid

PVST+ .he will be also able to describe LAN concepts hierarchical Network model concepts

418 | P a g e


Not applicable







1. Introduce switched networks 1. Suitable Description of Switched LAN architecture 2. Suitable matching of Switches to specific LAN

functions 3. Proper description of switched Environment

2. Conduct site survey

1. Efficient Study of the network structure and the environment

2. Adequate identification of the business goals and technical requirements

3. Proper identification of components, devices and tools to be used (software &hardware)

4. Convenient Contact of IT vendors and service suppliers to obtain specification and availability of identified components

5. Suitable Development of plans, with prioritized tasks and contingency arrangements, for installation of components with minimum disruption to client.

3. Basic switching concepts and

configuration

1. Appropriate Introduction to Ethernet/802.3 LANs 2. Appropriate description of Forwarding frames using

a switch 3. Proper application of Switch management

configuration 4. Adequate configuration of Configuring switch

security according to the network requirement

4. Perform V LANs configurations

1. Proper Introduction of VLANs 2. Systematic description of VLAN trunking 3. Systematic Configuration of VLANS and Trunks

5. Perform VTP configurations 1. Proper description of VTP Concepts 2. Proper description of VTP operations 3. Proper Configuration of VTP

419 | P a g e

6. Perform STP configuration 1. Proper introduction and configuration of STP 2. Convenient Convergence of STP 3. Proper Configuration of PVST+,RSTP and rapid PVST+

7. Implement Inter-VLAN routing

1. Suitable Introduction of inter VLAN Routing 2. Proper Configuration of inter VLAN routing 3. Proper implementation of Layer 3 switching

8. Test and troubleshoot switched N/W

1. Proper Troubleshooting of VLANs and Trunks 2. Proper Troubleshooting of VTP configuration 3. Proper Troubleshooting of STP configuration 4. Proper Troubleshooting of inter VLANS

configuration 5. Proper Troubleshooting of switch hardware

component

9. Document the work done 1. Accurate documentation of review process 2. Effective reporting procedures of the task

accomplished are in place and used 3. Methodical Writing of the technical journal and

recommendation

420 | P a g e

LU 1:Introduction to switched networks

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. DescribeSwitched LAN architecture 2. Match Switches to specific LAN functions 3. Describe switched Environment

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 1.1:DescribeSwitched LAN architecture.

The hierarchical network model

A hierarchical network in

medium sized business

Benefit of hierarchical network

Scalability

Redundancy

Performance

Security

Manageability

Maintainability

Principal of hierarchical network

design

Convergence

Separating video, voice and Data

network

Introduction to converged

network

o Brainstorming on switch

architecture


network design benefits


picture on hierarchical

network


o Practices switched LAN

architecture

- Switch

- Books

- Video aid

- Internet

- Simulator

software

- Cables

- Computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources

421 | P a g e





Written evidence o Written Evidence o Performance evidence

oral

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

Principal of hierarchical network design

The hierarchical network model

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.2: Match Switches to specific LAN functions

Consideration for

hierarchical network

switches

Traffic flow analysis

User communities

analysis

Data stores and Data

servers Analysis


topology

o Group discussion on switch

design in hierarchical network


picture


o Practices on switches

- Switch

- Reference Books

- Video aid

- Internet


- Cables

- Computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Suitable Description of Switched LAN architecture

422 | P a g e

Topology diagrams

Switch features

Switch form factors

Fixed

configuration

switches

Modular

configuration

switches

Stackable

configuration

switches

Port density

PoE and Layer 3

functionality

Switch features in

hierarchical network

Access Layer switch

features

Distribution Layer

switch features

Core Layer switch

feature

Switches for small and

medium sized business

Feature of catalyst

Switches






Suitable matching of Switches to specific LAN functions

423 | P a g e

Written evidence

Oral

Performance

product


Checklist

Score

Yes No

Consideration for hierarchical network switches

Switch features

Switch features in hierarchical network

Switches for small and medium sized business

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.3: Describe switched Environment

Switching as a general

Concept

Ingress port

Destination Address

Switch Mac Address

Table

Switching domains

Collusion domains

Broadcast domains

Alleviating Network

congestion

High port

density

Large frame

buffers

Port speed

o Brainstorming on switched

domain

o Group discussion on switch as

general concept


picture


o Practices on alleviating network

congestion

- Switch

- Reference Books

- Video aid

- Internet


- Cables

- Computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources

424 | P a g e

Fast internal

switching

Lower per pot

cost






Presentation


expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

Switching as a general Concept

Switch Mac Address Table

Switching domains.

Observation


Proper description of switched Environment

425 | P a g e


2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Analyze facilities and existing networks 2. Identify components, devices ,tools, connectors and

media 3. Identify Security requirements 4. Design and interpret Building blueprint

15 Hours



Initial environment

evaluation

Selection of router

deployment




survey methodology

Active survey

methodology


system

Current network

usage



process





system


- Books

- Router

- IT Tool Kit

- Cables

- Visual aids

- Internet


- Computer

- Hand-out notes


Content Learning

activities

Resources

426 | P a g e




Written evidence

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No



Observation


Hardware Devices:


Router


Wireless Router

Networking Access

Devices:

Switches


Security Devices:


Devices


software systems



o Exercises or Labs


- Router

- Switch

- Bridge

- Wireless Access

Point

- Firewalls

- Wireless Router

- End Devices

- NICs

Content Learning

activities

Resources



427 | P a g e

Firewalls

End Devices:

Computers(Work

stations, laptops,file

servers,web servers)

Network Printers

Security Cameras

Mobile Handheld

Devices(Smartphones,Ta

blets,PDAs)


NIC



Ipconfig /all

Ping

Trace route

Nslook up

Debug

Netstat

putty/Tera Term

Subnet and IP

calculator

Speedtest.net/pin

gtest.netpathping/

mtr

route

Software Tools:

Packet

Tracer

Edraw Max


System(IOS)

Versions

Updating and

upgrading IOS

IOS types

Connectors:

RJ45,RJ11

Media:

- Wireless Adapter

Cards

- Straight cables

- Crosse over

Cables

- Internet

- Books

- RJ45 Connectors

- Mobile Handheld

Devices( Smart

phones, Tablets,

PDAs)

428 | P a g e

WAN cables( Serial

cable)

LAN cables (

Straight and Cross

over cable)

Console cable

Aux cable






Written evidence

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

Hardware devices

Hardware components

Software tools

Media

Connectors


Observation


Adequate Identification of components, devices ,tools, connectors and media

429 | P a g e


Authentication

Confidentiality

Auditing


Confidentiality and

Authentication


configuration


picture


- Internet

- Books

- Rack

- Hand-out notes

- Computer

- Visual aids

-





Written evidence

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

Authentication

Authorization

Confidentiality

Content Learning

activities

Resources



430 | P a g e

Observation




EdrawMax or Packet

Tracer

o Brainstorming on


blueprint


diagram

o Exercises or Labs


- Internet

- Books


- Hand-out notes

- Computer

- Visual aids





Written evidence

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No


Content Learning

activities

Resources



431 | P a g e

Observation

432 | P a g e

LU 3: Describe Basic switching concepts and configuration

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Introduce Ethernet/802.3 LANs 2. Describe Forwarding frames using a switch 3. Apply Switch management configuration 4. Perform switch Security Configuration

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1Introduce Ethernet/802.3 LANs

The key elements of Ethernet/

802.3 Networks

Media Access Control In

Ethernet

Carrier sense Multiple

access collusion

detection(CSMA/CD)

Ethernet communications

Unicast communication

Multicast

communication

Broadcast

communication

Preamble and start frame

Delimiter fields

Destination MAC address

field

Source MAC address field

Length /type field

Data and pad fields

Frame check sequence

field

Duplex settings

Half duplex

o Brainstorming on Ethernet

technology


preamble and start frame

delimiter fields


picture on network


duplex functionality

o Practices switched on LAN

architecture

- Switch

- User guide

- IT tools kit

- Video aid

- Internet


- Reference books

- Computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources

433 | P a g e

Full duplex

Switch port settings

Auto option setting

Full option setting

Half option setting

MAC addressing and switch MAC

address tables

MAC addressing

Switch MAC address

tables

Design consideration for

Ethernet/802.3 Networks

Bandwidth and Throuhgput

Collusion domains

Broadcast domains

Network latency

Network congestion

LAN segmentation





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

product

True and false Matching Sentence completion Ticking

Expose


Appropriate Introduction to Ethernet/802.3 LANs

434 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

The key elements of Ethernet/ 802.3 Networks

Design consideration for Ethernet/802.3 Networks

LAN segmentation

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.2 Describe Forwarding frames using a switch

Switch packet Forwarding Methods

Store and forward switching

Cut-through switching

Symmetric and Asymmetric switching

Port based and Shared memory

buffering

Port- based memory buffering

Shared memory buffering

Layer 2 and layer 3 Switching

o Brainstorming on

forwarding frame

o Group discussion Symmetric

and asymmetric switching


o Practice on switch packet

forwarding Methods

- User guide

- Video aid

- Internet

- Simulator

software

- Reference Books





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

product

True and false Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Appropriate description of Forwarding frames using a switch

435 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Switch packet Forwarding Methods

Symmetric and Asymmetric switching

Port based and Shared memory buffering

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.3.Apply Switch management configuration

Navigating command line

interface mode

Command line interface

GUI- based alternatives to the

CLI

Device manager

SNMP network

management

Using the help facility

Context sensitive help

Word help

Command syntax help

Console error messages

The switch boot sequence

Basic switch configuration

Management interface

considerations

Configure IP connectivity

Configure web interface


configuration management


picture on command line

interface mode


o Practical on basic switch

management

- User guide

- Video aid

- Internet


- Reference Books

- computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources

436 | P a g e

Managing the MAC Address

table

Verify switch configuration

Basic switch management

Backup Configuration files

Clearing configuration

information

Deleting a stored configuration

files





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

product

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose


Proper application of Switch management configuration

437 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.4 Perform switch Security Configuration

Configuring basic switch

security:

Configure console access

Configure Virtual Terminal

access

Configure EXE Mode

password

Configure Encrypted

Passwords

Enable password Recovery

Configure a Login Banner

Configure a MOTD Banner

Telnet and SSH

Common security Attacks and

counter measures:

MAC address Attacks

VLAN Hopping

ARP Attacks

DHCP attacks

Spoofing Attacks

General Attacks

Port security


security

o Group discussion on security

attacks and counter

measures


picture


o Practical on switch security

- User guide

- Video aid

- Internet


- Reference Books

- computer


Checklist Score

Yes No

command line interface mode Navigation

help facility utility

The switch boot sequence

Basic switch configuration

Basic switch management

stored configuration files Deleting

Observation

Content Learning

activities

Resources

438 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

product

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

basic switch security configuration

Common security Attacks and counter measures

Observation


Adequate configuration of Configuring switch security according to the network

requirement

439 | P a g e

LU 4: Introduce VLANs configurations

4

Learning Outcomes:

1. Introduce VLANs 2. Describe VLAN trunking 3. Configure VLANS and Trunks

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 4.1Introduce VLANs

VLAN overview

Benefit of VLAs

VLAN ID range

Normal range

Extended range

VLAN characteristics

VLANs Type s

Network traffic types

Switch port Membership Modes

Static VLANs

Dynamic VLANs

Voice VLAN

Controlling broadcast Domains with

VLANs

Network without VLANs

Network with VLANs


address


design goals


picture on network traffic


o Practices on controlling

broadcast domain

- User guide

- Video aid

- Internet


- Reference Books

- computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources

440 | P a g e


routers and switches

Intra- VLAN communication

Inter-VLAN communication


VLANs and Layer 3 forwarding





Written evidence

Oral evidence

product

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Checklist Score

Yes No

Benefits of VLANs

VLAN ID range

VLAN characteristics

VLANs Types

Network traffic types

Switch port Membership Modes

Observation


Proper Introduction of VLANs

441 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 4.2.Describe VLAN trunking

What is a Trunk?

Benefits of VLAN trunk

VLAN trunk types

802.1 Q frame tagging (IEEE)

Inter-switch Link (ISL) by CISCO

Native VLANs and 802.1Q Trunking

Tagged frame

Untagged frame

Trunking operation

DTP modes

ON (default) mode

Dynamic auto mode

Dynamic desirable mode

Turn off DTP mode

o Brainstorming on VLAN

trunk

o Group discussion on 802.1

Q frame tagging (IEEE)

o Group discussion on ISL


internet

o Practices on disabling DTP

mode

- User guide

- Video aid

- Internet

- Simulator

software

- Reference Books

- computer





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

product

True and false

Matching

Sentence completion

Ticking

Expose

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Systematic description of VLAN trunking

442 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Benefits of VLAN trunk

VLAN trunk types

Native VLANs and 802.1Q Trunking

Trunking operation

DTP modes

DTP mode Turning off

Observation

Learning Outcome 4.3 Configure VLANS and Trunks

Configuration of VLANs Creation of VLANs Assigning of switch ports to a

VLANs Verification of VLAN configuration

Configuration of Trunks Enable Trunking on the inter-

switch connections Verification of trunk configuration

o Brainstorming on how to configure VLANs

o Group discussion on VLAN Configurations



o Lab exercises

- User guide - Video aid - Internet - Simulator

software - Reference Books - computer





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

Product

True and false Matching Sentence completion Ticking Expose

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Systematic Configuration of VLANS and Trunks.

443 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

VLANs Configuration

Trunks Configuration

Observation

444 | P a g e

LU 5:Perform VTP configurations

5

Learning Outcomes:

1. Describe the VTP Concepts

2. Describe VTP Operations

3. Configure the VTP

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 5.1 Describe the VTP Concepts

What is a VTP?

VTP BENEFITS

VTP components:

VTP Domain

VTP Advertisement

VTP Modes:

VTP Server Mode

VTP Client Mode

VTP Transparent Mode

VTP Pruning

o Brainstorming on VTP

o Group discussion on VTP

modes


o Practical exercise on VTP

- Switch

- Books

- IT tools kit

- Video aid

- Internet


- Cables

- Computer





Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper description of VTP Concepts

445 | P a g e

Written evidence

Oral evidence


Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

VTP BENEFITS

VTP components

Observation

Learning Outcome 5.2.Describe VTP Operations

Default VTP configuration

VTP version

Configuration revisions

VTP Domain name

VTP Operating Mode

VTP Pruning Mode

VTP V2 Mode

VTP traps generation

Number of existing VLANs

VTP Domain name propagation

VTP frame structure

VTP reversion number

o Brainstorming on Default

VTP configuration

o Group discussion on VTP

Domain name propagation


internet

o Lab exercises on VTP

Operations

- Switch

- Books

- IT tools kit

- Video aid

- Internet

- Simulator

software

- Cables

- Computer


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper description of VTP operations

446 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

Default VTP configuration

VTP Domain name propagation

VTP frame structure

VTP reversion number

Observation

LearningOutcome 5.3Configure the VTP

VTP configuration guidelines

VTP server switches

VTP client switches

Managing VLAN on VTP Server

Enabling VTP version

Enabling VTP pruning

Adding a VTP client switch to a VTP

Domain

o Brainstorming on VTP

configuration guidelines


managing VLAN on VTP

server


o Lab exercises on VTP

configuration

- Switch

- Books

- IT tools kit

- Video aid

- Internet

- Simulator

software

- Cables

- Computer

Content Learning

activities

Resources

447 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

VTP configuration guidelines

VLAN management on VTP Server

VTP version Enabling

VTP pruning Enabling

Addition of VTP client switch to a VTP Domain

Observation


Proper Configuration of VTP

448 | P a g e

LU 6:Perform STP configurations

6

Learning Outcomes:

1. Configure STP 2. Converge STP 3. Configure PVST+,RSTP and rapid PVST+

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 6.1 Describe the VTP Concepts

Introduction to STP

Redundancy Examine a redundant design Issues with redundancy Real word redundancy issues

Spanning Tree Algorithm

STP BPDU

Bridge ID

Port roles

STP port states and BPDU Timers

Configuration of STP bridges IDs

o Brainstorming on STP configuration

o Group discussion on Redundancy

o Demonstration by video/ picture on Bridges IDs

o Further research on internet o Practical on STP

configuration

- Switch - Books - IT tools kit - Video aid - Internet - Simulator software - Cables - Computer





Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper introduction and configuration of STP

449 | P a g e

Written evidence

Oral evidence


Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Redundancy

Spanning Tree Algorithm

STP BPDU

Bridge ID

Port roles

STP port states and BPDU Timers

Configuration of STP bridges IDs

Observation

Learning Outcome 6.2.Converge STP

Electing roots bridge

Elect roots port

Electing designated ports and non-designated ports

STP topology change

o Brainstorming on STP convergence

o Group discussion on Electing roots port


o Practical on STP topology change

- Switch - Books - IT tools kit - Video aid - Internet - Simulator

software - Cables - Computer


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Convenient Convergence of STP

450 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

roots bridge Election

roots port Election

designated ports Election and non-designated ports Election

STP topology change

Observation

LearningOutcome 6.3Configure PVST+,RSTP and rapid PVST+

STP Variants

PVST+ Bridge ID

Configure PVST+ Primary and Secondary root

Bridges PVST+ switch priority

RSTP RSTP characteristics RSTP BPDU Edge ports Link types RSTP Ports states and port roles

Configuring rapid PVST+

Design STP for trouble avoidance

o Brainstorming on PVST+ Configuration

o Group discussion onRSTP o Further research on internet

Practical exercises on Configuring rapid PVST+



Content Learning

activities

Resources

451 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

STP Variants

PVST+ Bridge ID

PVST+ Configuration

RSTP

rapid PVST+ Configuration

STP Design for trouble avoidance

Observation


Proper Configuration of PVST+,RSTP and rapid PVST+

452 | P a g e

LU 7:ImplementInter-VLAN routing

7

Learning Outcomes:

1. Introduceinter VLAN routing 2. Configure inter VLAN routing 3. ImplementLayer 3 switching operation and configuration

10 Hours

Learning Outcome 7.1Introduceinter VLAN routing

What is Inter -VLAN routing

Traditional inter -VLAN Routing

Router –on – a stick inter VLAN routing

Router interfaces inter VLAN Routing Router sub-interfaces and

inter VLAN Routing Router interface and sub-

interface comparison

o Brainstorming o Group discussion on types of

networks and topologies. o Demonstration by video/

picture o Further research on internet o Practical exercises on Inter-

VLAN routing o

- Switch - Books - IT tools kit - Video aid - Internet - Simulator software - Cables - Computer




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Suitable Introduction of inter VLAN Routing

453 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence


Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Traditional inter -VLAN Routing

Router –on – a stick inter VLAN routing

Router interfaces inter VLAN Routing

Observation

Learning Outcome 7.2.Configure inter VLAN routing

Configure traditional inter VLAN Routing

Configure router on- a -stick -inter VLAN routing

Verifying inter VLAN Routing

o Brainstorming on Inter-VLAN routing

o Group discussion on Verifying inter VLAN Routing


o Practical exercises on Inter-VLAN routing






Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper Configuration of inter VLAN routing

454 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

traditional inter VLAN Routing Configuration

Router Configuration on- a -stick -inter VLAN routing

inter VLAN Routing verification

Observation

LearningOutcome7.3ImplementLayer 3 switching operation and configuration

Introducing to layer 3 switching

Inter VLAN routing with switch virtual interfaces

Inter VLAN routing with SVIs

Inter VLAN routing with routed ports

Configuring static routes on a catalyst switch

o Brainstorming on Inter-VLAN routing with switch

o Group discussion on switch configuration


o Practical exercises on Switch configuration






Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper implementation of Layer 3 switching

455 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

Inter VLAN routing with switch virtual interfaces

Inter VLAN routing with SVIs

Inter VLAN routing with routed ports

static routes Configuration on a catalyst switch

Observation

456 | P a g e

LU 8:Perform VTP configurations

8

Learning Outcomes:

1. Troubleshoot Switch hardware and software operation 2. Troubleshoot VLANs and Trunks 3. Troubleshoot VTP configuration 4. Troubleshoot STP operation 5. Troubleshoot Inter-VLAN Routing configuration

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 8.1 Troubleshoot Switch hardware and software operation


Solving Problems

Troubleshooting the Power and Cooling Systems

Environmental Reporting Features

Troubleshooting Modules, Cables, and Connections

Reading System LEDs

Reading Port and Module LEDs

System Messages

Hardware tools: Troubleshooting Tools kit

o Group discussion on Problem Identification

o Brainstorming on Troubleshooting Tools

o Practical exercises on troubleshooting devices configuration



- Router - Books - IT tools kit - Video aid - Internet - Simulator





Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper Troubleshooting of switch hardware component

457 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence


Presentation

hecklist Score

Yes No


Problems solution

Hardware tools

Observation

Learning Outcome8. 2Troubleshoot VLANs and Trunks

Source of common problems with trunks

Native VLANs mismatches Trunk mode mismatches Allowed VLANs on trunks Incorrect VLAN list VLAN and IP subnets

Troubleshooting tools Show VLAN brief Show interface trunk Show interface fa0/5 switch

port Show running - config

Group discussion on common problems with trunks

o Brainstorming on Troubleshooting Tools

o Practical exercises on troubleshooting devices configuration





Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper Troubleshooting of VLANs and Trunks

458 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No




Observation

LearningOutcome8.3Troubleshoot VTP configuration

Identification of the problem: Troubleshooting VTP connectivity

Common VTP configuration issues and solution Incompatible VTP versions VTP password configuration errors Incorrect configured VTP mode

name All switches set to VTP client mode

o Brainstorming on Troubleshooting VTP connectivity

o Further research on internet o Practical exercises on

Troubleshooting VTP configuration




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper Troubleshooting of VTP configuration

459 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

Identification of the problem

Common VTP configuration issues and solution

Observation

Learning Outcom8.4Troubleshoot STP operation

Identify problems

Troubleshoot a faillure Portfast configuration error Switch or link failure

Network diameter issues

o Brainstorming on problems Identification

o Group discussion on Network diameter issues


o Practical exercises on STP Troubleshooting




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper Troubleshooting of STP configuration

460 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

Identify problems

Troubleshoot a faillure

Network diameter issues

Observation

LearningOutcome8.5Troubleshoot Inter-VLAN Routing configuration

Switch configuration issues

Router configuration issues

IP addressing issues

Layer 3 switch configuration issues VLANs SVIs

o Brainstorming on Switch configuration issues

o Group discussion on Router configuration issues

o Further research on internet o Practical exercises on

Troubleshooting Inter-VLAN Routing configuration




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper Troubleshooting of inter VLANS configuration

461 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No

Switch configuration issues

Router configuration issues

IP addressing issues

Layer 3 switch configuration issues

Observation

462 | P a g e


9

Learning Outcomes:

1. Document on network status

2. Report on the work done

3. Write technical journal and recommendation

5 Hours

Learning Outcome 9.1Document on network status

Description of network status before Status of network

infrastructure describe problems found

Review of user manual and previous report

Suggestion of solutions on problems found

Description of solution implementation


Network Devices, equipment and materials used

Description of the network status after work

Technical journal and recommendation report

o Brainstorming on Status of network infrastructure

o Group discussion on writing technical report

o Exercises on writing report o Documentary research

- Internet - Books - Paper - Pen - Computer - Drawing tools


Content Learning

activities

Resources

463 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence


Presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network status



Observation

Learning Outcome 9. 2Report on the work done

Description of network status before Status of network infrastructure









Content Learning

activities

Resources



464 | P a g e









Written evidence

Oral evidence


Checklist Score

Yes No


Observation



465 | P a g e

LearningOutcome 9.3Write technical journal and recommendation

Description of network status before Status of network infrastructure

















Written evidence

Oral evidence


Content Learning

activities

Resources



466 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

technical journal and recommendation

Observation



KICUKIRO DISTRICT has the new building with three floors, district’s

comity has decided to work in that building from next year, and the

ICT department decided that the users on the same VLAN from

different floors will communicate and VLANs also must communicate.

The numbers of VLANs are 3: (Administration, finance and ICT)

As network administrator you are requested to install and configure

the switches according to the above scenario to the following floors:

The administrationVLAN with 10 users (but not limited to)

The finance VLAN with 20 users (but not limited to)

The ICT VLAN with 20 users but not limited to

At the end of the work you are requested to submit a report and work

documentation, duration of the work is 3hrs

Note: The performance of the work before the time required (3h); it will be taken under consideration.

Router

switch

Computer

Console cables

Serial cables

Network toolkit

Ladder

Packet Tracer

draw Max

file servers

web servers NIC Wireless Adapter

cards


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Materials, tools and instruments are properly selected

Switches

Router

Computer

Cables

467 | P a g e


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: VLANS are scalable

Easy addition of users

Indicator: VLANS are flexible

Users from different floors can communicate

Indicator: Inter-VLAN is well configured

VLANs communicate

Observation


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: .Materials are well used

No wasted materials

Indicator Time is respected

Time required(3h)

Indicator: The report is Produced

Report format

Simulator (Packet tracer)

Console cable


Indicator: Switch is well configured

Hosts

Indicator: switch is well secured

console access

Physical access

Virtual Terminal access

IOS passwords

Login Banner

Telnet and SSH

Observation

468 | P a g e

Report content

Indicator: Total station is well used

Observation

Assesment Criterion:Perfection

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: .Workplace is well cleaned

No rubbish

IndicatorNetwork components are well cleaning

No dusts

Indicator: Time is well managed


Observation

References

1. Network topology. (2010, February 8). In Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia. Retrieved

February 9, 2010, from

http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Network_topology&oldid=342762416

2. Mitchell, B. (2010). Introduction to Client Server Networks. Retrieved March 1, 2010, from

About.com: http://compnetworking.about.com/od/basicnetworkingfaqs/a/client-server.htm

3. Dionys, D. (2008). How to Make a Network Cable. Unpublished. Produced for the VVOB

Program in Zambia 2008-2013. For more information about VVOB see www.vvob.be

469 | P a g e

N E W W I 4 0 1 - WIRELESS NETWORK INDOOR

NEWWI401 Set up wireless network indoor


Credits: 12 120

Sector: ICT



Purpose statement

This core module describes the skills, knowledge and attitude required to identify wireless local network

components adequately. The learner will be able to install and configure wireless network components,

perform WLAN network security, verify WLAN connectivity, conduct standard tests, measurements

and write technical report.


470 | P a g e

Not applicable







1.Apply wireless network

Concepts

1.1. Proper description of RFID technology and its functionality

1.2. Proper description of wireless network operations

1.3. Proper Identification of Wireless LAN threats

2. Plan and Conduct Site survey 2.1. Proper analysis of facilities and existing WIFI &WIRED

network

2.2. Systematic identification of Security requirements

2.3. Appropriate identification of tools, equipment and materials

used in wireless network indoor

2.4. Systematic design and interpretation of Building blueprint

3. Configure and maintain

wireless network

3.4 Systematic implementation of SOHO and Enterprise wireless

3.5 Relevant application of security to the technology applied

3.6 Efficient test of access point and verifying wireless

connection and security arrangements


4.Document the workdone 4.1 Accurate documentation of review process

4.2 Effective reporting procedures of the task accomplished are

in place and used

4.3 Methodical Writing of the technical journal and

recommendation

471 | P a g e

LU 1:Apply wireless network Concepts

1

Learning Outcomes:

1. Describe RFID technology and its functionality 2. Describe wireless network operations 3. Identify Wireless LAN threats

30 Hours

Learning Outcome 1.1 Describe RFID technology and its functionality

Why use wireless?

Why have Wireless LANs

become so popular?

Wireless LANs

Comparing a WLAN to a

LAN

WLANs Standards

Wi-Fi Certification

Supporting Mobility

Benefits of Wireless

Wireless Technologies

wireless infrastructure

components

Wireless NICs

Wireless Home Router

Wireless Access Points

Wireless Antennas

Small Wireless Deployment

Solutions

802.11 WLAN Topologies

Wireless Topology Modes

Ad Hoc Mode

o Group discussion on why use

wireless and its applications

o Brainstorming on wireless

infrastructure components

and WLAN deployment

solutions.

o Internet research

- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- wireless router

- wireless repeater

- Wireless Access Point

- USB Wireless Adapter

- Wireless PCI Adapter

- Wireless PCMCIA Card

- Antennas

- Computer

- Console cable

Content Learning

activities

Resources

472 | P a g e

Infrastructure Mode

RF fundamental:

radio frequency

principles of antennas

radio frequency

mathematics

spread spectrum

RF in perspective

Application of wireless:

network extension

building to building

last mile data delivery

mobility, SOHO

access role





Written or performance

Oral


presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Wireless configuration

Wireless application

Wireless infrastructure

RF fundamental Technologies

Observation


Proper description of RFID technology and its functionality

473 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 1.2Describe wireless network operations

Introduction to wireless network

operations

Wireless operations

802.11 Frame Structure

802.11 Frame Structure

Control Frames

Wireless Frame Type

Management Frames

Control Frames

CSMA/CA

Discovering APs

Channel Management

Frequency Channel Saturation

Selecting Channels

o Group discussion on channel

management


operations


- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- wireless router

- wireless repeater

- Wireless Access

Point

- USB Wireless

Adapter

- Wireless PCI

Adapter

- Wireless PCMCIA

Card

- Antennas

- Computer

- Console cable





Performance

oral


presentation

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper description of wireless network operations

474 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Wireless operations

Channel management

Observation

Learning Outcome 1.3Identify Wireless LAN threats

WLANs threats

DoS Attack

Management Frame

DoS Attacks

Rogue APs

Man-in-the-Middle Attack

o Group discussion on WLAN

threats

o Brainstorming on WLAN

threats

o Internet Research

- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- wireless router

- wireless repeater

- Wireless Access Point

- USB Wireless Adapter

- Wireless PCI Adapter

- Wireless PCMCIA Card

- Antennas

- Computer

- Console cable





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice questions Open questions

Presentation

Content Learning

activities

Resources


475 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Observation

476 | P a g e

LU 2:Plan and Conduct Site survey

2

Learning Outcomes:

1. Analyze facilities and existing WIFI &WIRED network 2. Identify Security requirements 3. Identify tools, equipment and materials used in wireless

network indoor 4. Design and interpret Building blueprint

20 Hours

Learning Outcome 2.1 Analyze facilities and existing WIFI &WIRED network


Perform an initial environment

evaluation

Select the proper APs for the

deployment

Enter the collected and

determined information into

Visual RF Plan



Passive physical site survey

methodology

Active survey methodology

Spectrum clearing methodology

Survey Methods

RF site survey

Analysis of existing system

Current network usage


o Group discussion on site

planning process

o Brainstorming on


o Exercises on site planning

process and environment

evaluation

o Internet Research

- Spectrum analyzer

- Protocol analysis

software

- Laptop with PC

Card and utilities

- Access point

- Antennas

- Paper and

pen/pencil

- Batteries

- Binoculars

- Communication

devices

- Camera

- Measuring devices

- Mounting tools

and devices

- Marking tape

- Rolling carts


Content Learning

activities

Resources

477 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence


presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No



Observation

Learning Outcome 2.2 Identify Security requirements

Authentication

Confidentiality

Auditing


security requirements

o Brainstorming on WLAN

security requirements


- Spectrum analyzer

- Protocol analysis

software

- Laptop with PC Card

and utilities

- Access point

- Antennas

- Paper and

pen/pencil

- Batteries

- Binoculars

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Proper analysis of facilities and existing WIFI &WIRED network

478 | P a g e

- Communication

devices

- Camera

- Measuring devices

- Mounting tools and

devices

- Marking tape

- Rolling carts





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false Open questions questions Matching Sentence completion Ticking presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Authentication

Confidentiality

Auditing

Observation


Systematic identification of Securityrequirements

479 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 2.3 Identify tools, equipment and materials used in wireless network

indoor

Spectrum analyzer

Protocol analysis software

Laptop with PC Card and utilities

Access point

Antennas

Batteries

Binoculars

Communication devices

Camera

Measuring devices

Mounting tools and devices

Marking tape

Rolling carts

o Group discussion on tools

and equipment used in

wireless

o Demonstration by

video/picture of wireless

tools and equipment

o Brainstorming on tools and

equipment used in wireless

o Internet Research

- Spectrum

analyzer

- Protocol analysis

software

- Laptop with PC

Card and utilities

- Access point

- Antennas

- Batteries

- Binoculars

- Communication

devices

- Camera

- Measuring

devices

- Mounting tools

and devices

- Marking tape

- Rolling carts





Written evidence

Oral evidence


presentation

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Appropriate identification of tools, equipment and materials used in wireless network indoor

480 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Spectrum analyzer

Protocol analysis software

Computer

Wireless Access point

Wireless router

Wireless adapter card

Observation

Learning Outcome2.4 Design and interpret Building blueprint

Draw a schematic diagram of the

system using:

Edraw max, Packet Tracer,

VisualRF

o Practical exercise on how to

draw and interpret building

blueprint using Edraw max

and Packet Tracer

o Demonstration by

video/picture on how to

draw building blueprint

o Brainstorming on different

techniques and software

used to draw building

blueprint

o Internet Research

- Computer

- Software for

drawing(Edrwa

max,Packet

Tracer, VisualRF)

- Paper and pencil

- Projector




Content Learning

activities

Resources


Systematic design and interpretation of Building blueprint

481 | P a g e


Written evidence

Oral evidence


presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

Wireless LAN design

Observation

482 | P a g e

LU 3:Configure and maintain wireless network

3

Learning Outcomes:

1. Implement SOHO and Enterprise wireless 2. Apply security to the technology applied 3. Test access point and verify wireless connection and security

arrangements

4. Troubleshoot WLAN Problems 55 Hours

Learning Outcome 3.1 Implement SOHO and Enterprise wireless

Installing, configuring and managing

the following

WLAN devices:

Access points

Enterprise WLAN switches

and controllers

Remote office WLAN

switches and controllers

Power over Ethernet

injectors and switches

WLAN bridges

Residential WLAN

gateways

Enterprise encryption

gateways

WLAN mesh routers

Installing, Configuring, and

Managing

WLAN Client Devices :

PC Cards

o Group discussion

o Demonstration on installing

and configuring WLAN

devices.

o Brainstorming on SOHO

implementation

o Demonstration on installing

and configuring WLAN

devices.

o Research on internet

o Labs on installing and

configuring WLAN devices.

- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- wireless router

- wireless repeater

- Wireless Access

Point

- USB Wireless

Adapter

- Wireless PCI

Adapter

- Wireless PCMCIA

Card

- Antennas

- Computer

- Console cable

- Projector

Content Learning

activities

Resources

483 | P a g e

USB, Compact Flash, and SD

devices

PCI and Mini−PCI cards

Wireless presentation

gateways





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Performance

product

Multiple choice True or false questions Matching

Sentence completion

Checklist Score

Yes No

Wireless availability

Wireless accessibility

Observation


Systematic implementation of SOHO and Enterprise wireless

484 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 3.2Apply security to the technology applied

Identifying and Preventing WLAN

Security Attacks

Eavesdropping

Hijacking

Man−in−the−middle

Denial of service (DoS)

Management interface

exploits

Encryption cracking

Authentication cracking

MAC spoofing

Peer−to−peer attacks

Social engineering

o Group discussion on how

to prevent wireless

network security attacks

o Brainstorming on

wireless network security

attacks documentation

o Practical labs on wireless

networks security

configuration

o Internet Research

- Books

- Internet

- Handout notes

- wireless router

- wireless repeater

- Wireless Access

Point

- USB Wireless

Adapter

- Wireless PCI

Adapter

- Wireless PCMCIA

Card

- Antennas

- Computer

- Console cable

- Projector





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false question Matching Sentence completion Ticking presentation s

Content Learning

activities

Resources


Relevant application of security to the technology applied

485 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Authentication

Confidentiality

Authorization

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.3Test access point and verify wireless connection and security

arrangements

Wireless LAN Testing Considerations

Signal Coverage Testing

Performance Testing

In-Motion Testing

Security Vulnerability Testing

Acceptance/Verification

Testing

Simulation Testing

Prototype Testing

Pilot Testing

Test Documentation

Background

Test team

Requirements summary

Test methods and tools

Test results and analysis

Recommendations


wireless network test

considerations


network test considerations

and test documentation

o Practical Exercises WLAN

testing

o Internet Research

- Spectrum

analyzer

- Protocol analysis

software

- Laptop with PC

Card and utilities

- Access point

- Antennas

- Batteries

- Binoculars

- Communication

devices

- Camera

- Measuring

devices

- Mounting tools

and devices

- Marking tape

- Rolling carts


Content Learning

activities

Resources


Efficient test of access point and verifying wireless connection and security

arrangements

486 | P a g e




Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false questions

Matching

Checklist Score

Yes No

LAN Testing Considerations

Observation

Learning Outcome 3.4: Troubleshoot WLAN Problems

Troubleshooting Wireless Station

Connection to AP

Can Any Wireless Stations

Connect to the AP?

Troubleshooting Wireless

Stations

Wireless Network Detected

Signal Interference

Site Survey

Station Status

Using the Correct SSID

Station Configuration

Correct Security Settings

TCP/IP Protocol Installed and

Configured

Troubleshooting AP Connection to

Wired LAN

Port Configuration on

Wired/Wireless

Network Cable

Group discussion on

common WLAN problems

Practical Exercises on

WLAN troubleshooting

Brainstorming on WLAN

troubleshooting

- Spectrum analyzer

- Protocol analysis

software

- Laptop with PC

Card and utilities

- Access point

- Antennas

- Batteries

- Binoculars

- Communication

devices

- Camera

- Measuring devices

- Mounting tools

and devices

- Marking tape

- Rolling carts

Content Learning

activities

Resources

487 | P a g e

Troubleshooting the AP

Check for Power Issues with

the AP

Check for Booting Issues with

the AP

Check AP LED Behavior

Check AP Has Correct IP

Address

Check AP is Broadcasting the

SSID

Check AP Radio Settings





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Sentence completion Ticking

presentation

Checklist Score

Yes No

WLAN Troubleshooting AP Considerations

Observation



488 | P a g e


4

Learning Outcomes:


15 Hours

Learning Outcome 4.1Document on network status


before

Status of network

infrastructure



previous report


problems found


implementation


task accomplished


materials used


after work






technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools

Content Learning

activities

Resources

489 | P a g e





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false questions Matching

Sentence completion

Checklist Score

Yes No

Network status


Observation

Learning Outcome 4.2Report on the work done


before

Status of network

infrastructure



previous report


problems found




technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools

Content Learning

activities

Resources



490 | P a g e


implementation


task accomplished


materials used


after work







Written evidence

Oral evidence

Multiple choice True or false questions Matching Sentence completion

Checklist Score

Yes No


Observation



491 | P a g e

Learning Outcome 4.3Write technical journal and recommendation


before

Status of network

infrastructure



previous report


problems found


implementation


task accomplished


materials used


after work






technical report



- Internet

- Books

- Paper

- Pen

- Computer

- Drawing tools





Written evidence

Oral evidence

Ticking presentation

Content Learning

activities

Resources



492 | P a g e

Checklist Score

Yes No

Recommendation

network status after work

Journal and recommendation report

Observation



SONARWA after finishing its new building with five rooms at KAMONYI

district wants to set up a secured WLAN in that house,

As a network administrator in HIGH-TECH, you are requested to perform

that task based on the following instructions:

The network users should be 20 maximum, the network authentication,

confidentiality, auditing measures should be applied, the network

standard should be IEEE 802.11b, access point should assign host

dynamically. The task should be accomplished in 3 hours; the work

report should be submitted to the General Director.

Note: If the performance of the task is below the maximum time required (3 hours), it will be taken under consideration

Wireless Router

Wireless access point

Wireless cards

Computer

Console cables

Network toolkit

Ladder

493 | P a g e


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Tools and equipment are well selected

Wireless Router

Wireless access point

Wireless cards

Computer

Console cables

Network toolkit

Ladder

Drilling machine

Tape measure

Hummer

Indicator: Installation and configuration are well done

Hardware installation

IP address

Interface status

Protocols

Indicator: WLAN security is well applied

Authentication

Confidentiality

Auditing

Indicator: Report and documentation are well done

WLAN design and interpretation

Indicator: Testing is well done

Network reachable

Wireless router Can fragment

reachable protocol

Ports reachable

Reachable hosts

Observation

494 | P a g e


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Wireless devices are well mounted

Steadiness

Tightness

Fitness

Indicator: Signal strength and transfer rate met the standards

Download speed

Upload speed

Latency

Indicator: Wireless connectivity is well done

Availability of wireless connectivity

Observation


Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: .Materials are well used

No wasted materials

Indicator: The time is respected

Time required(3h)

Indicator:Internetwork is well done


Indicator:The report is Produced


Report format

Report content

Observation

495 | P a g e

Perfection

Checklist Score

Yes No

Indicator: Workplace is well cleaned

No rubbish

Indicator: Network components are well cleaned

No dusts

Indicator:.Time is well managed


Observation

Reference books:

1. Stallings, W.A., “Local Network Performance”, IEEE Communications Magazine, 22, 2,

2. February 1984.

3. Mitchell, B. (2010). Computer and Wireless Networking Basics. Retrieved March 1, 2010, from

About.com:

http://compnetworking.about.com/od/basicneworkingconcepts/u/computer_networking_basics.htm

4. WifiDocs: Wireless Trouble Shooting Guide. (2009, November 25). In Ubuntu Documentation.

Retrieved February 16, 2010 from

https://help.ubuntu.com/community/WifiDocs/WirelessTroubleShootingGuide

496 | P a g e

ote:

GLOSSARY

Assessment: A process of gathering and judging

evidence in order to decide whether a person

has attained a standard of performance.

Assessment criteria: Statements which describe

performances and place them in context with

sufficient precision to allow valid and reliable

assessment.

Best practice: Management practices and work

processes that lead to outstanding or top-class

performance and provide examples for others.

Competency standard: An industry-determined

specification of performance which sets out the

skills, knowledge and attitudes required to

operate effectively in employment. Competency

standards are made up of units of competency,

which are themselves made up of elements of

competency, together with performance

criteria, a range of variables, and an evidence

guide.

Competency: means the ability to apply

knowledge, skills and personal, social and

methodological skills in the workplace or

during learning, as well as in personal and

professional development. This ability or

capacity is acquired through leaning, exposure to

the tasks and series of training allowing one to

perform specific task autonomously. Reason

why in the context of the CBE Framework

competencies are described as responsibility

and independence.

Competency-based assessment (or CBA): The

gathering and judging of evidence in order to

decide whether a person has achieved a

standard of competency.

Complementary competencies: Set of

knowledge, skills and attitudes which are not

directly linked to a specific occupation or

industry, but which are important for work,

education and life in general, such as

communication, mathematics, organizational

aptitude, and computer literacy, interpersonal

and analytical competency.

Core modules: Modules leading to

competencies’ acquisition that an industry

sector has agreed upon as essential for a person

to be accepted as competent at a particular

level. All modules may be core, but in many cases

competency at a level will involve core modules

plus optional or specialization modules. Core

competencies are normally those central to work

in a particular industry.

Credential: Formal certification issued for

successful achievement of a defined set of

outcomes, e.g. successful completion of a course

in recognition of having achieved particular

knowledge, skills or competencies; successful

completion of an apprenticeship or traineeship.

Credit: The acknowledgement that a person has

satisfied the requirements of a module.

Curriculum: The specifications for a course or

subject (module) which describe all the learning

experiences a learner undergoes, generally

including objectives, content, intended learning

outcomes, teaching methodology,

recommended or prescribed assessment tasks,

assessment exemplars, etc.

Evidence guide: The part of a competency

standard which provides a guide to the

interpretation and assessment of the unit of

competency, including the aspects which need

to be emphasized in assessment, relationships to

other units, and the required evidence of

competency.

Flexible delivery: A range of approaches to

providing education and training, giving learners

greater choice of when, where and how they

learn. Flexible delivery may involve distance

education, mixed-mode delivery, online

education, self-paced learning, self-directed

learning, etc.

Formal education: Also formal training

education or training provided in educational

institutions such as schools, universities,

colleges, etc. or off the job in a workplace,

usually involving direction from a teacher or

instructor.

General competencies: competencies

correspond to larger operations that go beyond

the tasks, but generally contribute to their

implementation. These activities require more

fundamental learning and are generally common

to several tasks and transferable to many work

situations.

Generic modules: Modules leading to the

attainment of complementary competencies.

Informal education: The acquisition of

knowledge and skills through experience,

reading, social contact, etc.

Internship: An opportunity for a learner to

integrate career related experience by

participating in planned, supervised work.

Key competencies: Any of several generic skills

or competencies considered essential for people

to participate effectively in the workforce. Key

competencies apply to work generally, rather

than being specific to work in a particular

occupation or industry. The following are key

areas of competency which were developed into

seven key competencies: collecting, analyzing

and organizing information; communicating

ideas and information; planning and organizing

activities; working with others and in teams;

using mathematical ideas and techniques;

solving problems; and using technology.

Knowledge: means the result of the adoption

of information through the learning process.

Knowledge is a set of facts, principles, theories

and practices related to area of work or study. In

CBE context lifelong learning knowledge is

described as theoretical and / or factual.

Learning outcomes: are statements of what

learner knows, understands and can perform,

based on the completion of the learning

process, defined by knowledge, skill and

competency.

Learning activities: Suggested activities that can

be developed during lesson planning and activity

preparation. The choice of learning activities

must be tailored according to group size,

available material resources and communication

tools.

Learning hours: Amount of hours required to

acquire the competency, including the time

allocated to evaluation, which is estimated

between 5 and 10% of the total learning time of

the competency.

Learning outcomes: Statements that indicate

what learners will know or be able to do as a

result of a learning activity. Learning outcomes

are usually expressed as knowledge, skills, or

attitudes.

Learning unit: Any of the basic building blocks

of a module, which describes the key activities

or the elements of the work covered by the

module

Module: A unit of training which corresponds to

one competency and which can be completed on

its own or linked to others.

Occupation: The principal business of one’s life.

Performance criteria The part of a competency

standard specifying the required level of

performance in terms of a set of outcomes which

need to be achieved in order to be deemed

competent. It describes the quality requirements

of the result obtained in labor performance.

Qualification: means the formal name for the

result of a process of assessment and validation,

which is obtained when a competent body

determines that an individual has achieved

learning outcomes to the standards laid down.

Quality assurance: The systems and procedures

designed and implemented by an organization to

ensure that its products and services are of a

consistent standard and are being continuously

improved.

Recognition of prior learning (or RPL): The

acknowledgement of a person’s skills and

knowledge acquired through previous training,

work or life experience, which may be used to

grant status or credit in a subject or module.

Skills: are the ability to apply knowledge and use

the principle of “know how” to perform a specific

task and to solve the problem. In the context

of the CBE Framework, skills are defined as

cognitive (involving the use of logical, intuitive

and creative thinking), practical (including

physical skill and use of methods, materials,

devices and instruments) and social skills

(communication and cooperation skills,

emotional intelligence and other).

Specific competencies: Competencies that are

directly related to the tasks of the occupation in

the workplace context. They refer to concrete,

practical, and focused aspects

Traineeship: A system of vocational training

combining off-the-job training at an approved

training provider with on-the-job training and

practical work experience. Traineeships

generally take one to two years and are now a

part of the New Apprenticeships system.

Unit of competency: A component of a

competency standard. A unit of competency is a

statement of a key function or role in a particular

job or occupation. See also element of

competency, performance criteria, range of

variables.

WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY – WDA P. O. BOX 2707 Kigali Rwanda T +250 255113365 F +250 255113365 E [email protected] I www.wda.gov.rw

Workforce Development Authority

Empowering people with employable skills and entrepreneurship capacity

tvet certificate iv in networking

Documents